Home

User`s Manual of SGSW-24040 / 24240 Series 1

1. Figure 4 17 1 Chain Stack topology 328 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series a Ring Stack A ring of switches thereby providing redundant forwarding paths Figure 4 17 2 Ring Stack topology E Back to Back Stack Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports 7 IN TAR NY EN TE CJ E Figure 4 17 3 Back to back Stack topology O 329 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 17 1 Stack This section provides information for understand stacking architecture include the below items E Switch IDs e Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs e Removing a Switch From the Stack e Replacing a Switch e General Switch ID Assignment Rules B Master Election E Stack Redundancy m Shortest Path Forwarding 4 17 1 1 Switch IDs The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a SGSW Switch E Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs When a switch is added to the stack a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch The automatic SID assignment can be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch The Switch IDs of two switches can be swapped by simply interchanging the values in the Switch ID c
2. S SSS SSS SSS SS SSS SS SSSI Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration screen page screenshot 276 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears DHCP Snooping Port Statistics for Switch 1 Port 1 Auto Refresh C Port 1 v Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Tx Discover Rx Offer Tx Offer
3. O lt Mirroring PoE Port_Security Ports Private_VLANs QoS SNMP Security haa a a a ll N14 SS SN un lt un lt un lt Spanning_Tree Stack system UPnP VLANs Voice_VLAN haa unl unl un S14 SINS 4 Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name The name of the privilege group is identified In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them 74 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriP HY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everyth
4. j Swe Figure 4 8 10 MVR Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR 182 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e VLAN ID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID e Mode Enable MVR on the port e Type Specify the MVR port type on the port e Immediate Leave Buttons Save Click to save changes Enable the fast leave on the port Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 8 MVR Status This page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears MVR Status for Switch 1 Auto Refresh O Statistics VLAN 1 Reports 2 Reports Y3 Reports 2 Leave ID Receive Receive Receive Receive Multicast Groups Port Members a co Teo aee No muticast grouPS OO No muticast groups The page includes the following fields Object Figure 4 8 11 MVR Status page screenshot Description e Group The present multicast groups Max are 128 groups in the multicast VLAN e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e V1 Reports Receive The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Receive The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Receive The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leave Receive Buttons The number of Received V2 Leave 183 User s Manual of SGSW 2
5. nN uo lt 2 ho E lt Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration screen page screenshot 279 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of IP Source Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All Guard Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports This value can be 0 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 280 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 11 appears The page includes the following fields Static IP Source Guard Table for Switch 1 Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table screen page screenshot Object Descriptio
6. lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 Default Setting high Example Set medium traffic class for voice VLAN SWITCH gt voice vlan traffic class medium Voice VLAN OUI Add Description Add Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Add lt oui_addr gt lt description gt 529 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx lt description gt Entry description Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI Example Add Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vlan oui add 00 11 22 test Voice VLAN OUI Delete Description Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Delete lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx Example Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vlan oui delete 00 11 22 Voice VLAN OUI Clear Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Clear Example Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vian oui clear 530 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Voice VLAN OUI Lookup Description Lookup Voice VLAN OUI entry Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Lookup lt oui_addr gt Param
7. 290 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series _ clear Flushes all dynamic entries e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt e Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 6 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by IP mask The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 13 6 appears Dynamic IP Source Guard Table for Switch 1 Start from Pot1 VLAN 11 and IP Address 0 0 0 0 i and IP Mask 0 0 0 0 with 120 entries per page Port VLAN ID IP Address IP Mask no more entries Auto Refresh C Refresh ke Ea Figure 4 13 6 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting f
8. Delete User Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user 72 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Once the new user is added the new user entry will be shown on the Users Configuration page Users Configuration PEA Privilige Level ue Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration page screenshot After changing the default password if you forget the password please press the Reset button on the front panel of the Managed Switch for over 10 seconds and then release it The current setting including VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode 73 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 5 Users Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels After the setup is completed please press Save button to take effect Please login the web interface with the new user name and password and the screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears Privilege Levels Configuration Privilege Levels Group Name configuration Configuration Execute Status Statistics Status Statistics Read only Read write Read only Read write Aggregation Diagnostics IGMP_Snooping IP ha al ll un lt LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MVR Maintenance ta us us lt lt La lt
9. Figure 4 11 20 Windows client popup login request message 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Local Area Connection 3 User name test Password co o o Logon domain Figure 4 11 21 264 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 Security This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics E Port Limit Control E Access Management E HTTPs SSH E DHCP Snooping E IP Source Guard a ARP Inspection 4 12 1 Port Limit Control This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of four different as described below The Limit Control module is one of a range of modules that utilizes a lower layer module the Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learned on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears 2
10. Replacing a Switch If a switch is to be replaced with another switch for example replacing failing 333 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series hardware the following procedure must be used to assign the configuration of the failing switch to the new hardware 1 Remove the failing switch from the stack For example assume that the failing switch had Switch ID 3 2 Insert the new switch into the stack The new switch is assigned an unused Switch ID 3 To remove the automatic switch ID assignment choose Delete followed by Save The new switch is then shown with Switch ID set to 4 To assign the configuration of Switch ID 3 to the new hardware simply choose 3 in the Switch ID column and click Save 5 The new hardware has now taken over the configuration of the failing hardware General Switch ID Assignment Rules When assigning Switch IDs to the devices in the stack you must note the following 1 Switches with assigned IDs can be changed to use any other switch ID possibly by swapping Switch ID with another active switch 2 When swapping two Switch IDs the devices will retain their own configuration except for the Switch ID 3 Switches without an assigned Switch ID can only be assigned to any unused ID 4 When assigning a Switch ID of an inactive switch to a new switch the new switch will inherit the former s configuration see Replacing a Switch above 5 Deleting a switch will remove any config
11. e Timezone Allow to select the time zone according to current location of switch e Server Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon seperates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also uses a legal IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 76 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 7 UPnP Configuration Configure UPnP on this page UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 9 appears UPnP Configuration Advertising Duration Figure 4 2 9 UPnP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mo
12. For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached e VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module e State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will 244 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds e Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Cea This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear All This button is available in th
13. Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 285 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 13 2 Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack and not per switch The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Static MAC Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears Static MAC Table Configuration for Switch 1 mac portmem AT ora Derete vran 10 mac asaress 27 o a ollo 292 Figure 4 13 2 Static MAC Table Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the entry e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Buttons Add new static entry Click to add new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 286 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 13 3 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted f
14. Show Limit Control configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Limit Control configuration SWITCH gt security network limit configuration Port Security Limit Control Configuration Disabled Disabled Action Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled bp pb BP A A FF BP A FF FF A aA FF FL A A 421 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled A A A A FP A FS R Security Network Limit Mode Description Set or show global enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable port security disable Globally disable port security default Show current global enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Example Enable the limit mode SWITCH gt security network limit mode enable Security Network Limit Aging Description Set or show aging enabledness 422 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Security Network Limit Aging enable disable Parameters enable Enable aging disable Disable aging default Show current enabledness of aging Default S
15. Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr_string gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example SWITCH gt ip ping 192 168 0 21 PING server 192 168 0 21 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 3 time 10ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IP DNS Description Set or show the DNS server address Syntax IP DNS lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set DNS IP address SWITCH gt ip dns 168 95 1 1 358 IP DNS Proxy Description Set or show the IP DNS Proxy mode Syntax IP DNS_Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable DNS Proxy disable Disable DNS Proxy Default Setting disable Example Enable DNS proxy function User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt ip dns_proxy enable IPv6 AUTOCINFIG Description Set or show the IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable Parameters enable Enable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode disable Disable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Default Setting disable Example Enable
16. Description Add or delete ARP inspection static entry Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_mac gt lt allowed_ip gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port ARP inspection static entry delete Delete existing port ARP inspection static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_mac gt MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC address allowed for doing ARP request lt allowed_ip gt IP address a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request Default Setting 300 452 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Add ARP inspection static entry SWITCH gt security network arp inspection entry 1 add 1 00 30 4f 00 00 11 192 168 0 11 Security Network ARP Inspection Status Description Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries SWITCH gt security network arp inspection status Security AAA Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security AAA Configuration Example Show Auth configuration SWITCH gt security aaa configuration AAA Configuration Server Timeout 15 seconds Server Dead Time 300 seconds 453 RADIUS Authenticat
17. Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Default Setting 800007e5017f000001 Example Set 800007e5017f000002 for SNMPv3 local engine ID SWITCH gt security switch snmp engine id 800007e5017f000002 Security Switch SNMP Community Add Description 410 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Add or modify SNMPv3 community entry The entry index key is lt community gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Add lt community gt lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt Parameters lt community gt Community string lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask Example Add SNMPv3 community entry Security Switch SNMP Community Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 community entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp community delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup lt index gt 411 Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 community entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp community lookup Source IP Idx Community 192 168 0 20 2 private 0 0 0 0 Number of entries 2
18. PLANET Networking Communication User s Manual 24 Port Gigabit L2 L4 Managed Switch SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SGSW 24040P gt SGSW 24040P4 SGSW 24240 SGSW 24240R SGSW 24040HP www PLANET com tw User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2014 Contents are subject to revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual
19. Q in Q Private VLAN Voice VLAN gt k IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk ort trunking Support 12 groups of 16 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 4 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority DS TOS field in IP Packet IGMP3 IGMP v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups nooping IGMP Querier mode support IP based ACL MAC based ACL Access Control List Up to 256 entries RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB 29 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base T X 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port Trunk with LACP Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1p Class of Service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP SGSW Stackable Fiber models Hardware Specifications Copper Ports 8 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports shared with Port 1 Port 8 SFP min
20. Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration gt Security gt AAA page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears 227 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Stack Gl
21. The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets e Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets e Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets e Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object Description e Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short frames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long frames received with valid CRC e Rx Fragments The number of short frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Jabber The number of long frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame
22. This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap 8 Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken e State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown e Reopen Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes
23. e CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP for the port 295 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped into a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frame are not shown in the LLDP statistic Only CDP TLVs are mapped into LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped into the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped into the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped into the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped into the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP supports system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness for a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but will be removed when the ho
24. ee 5 O a O El O El O 1 O E O E O E O E O E O E O E oe Sl O E O El O 6 O E O Ee O E O E O E O A O E O E ee E O 5 O E O 5 O E O E O E O E O A O E Oe O eo ke E O E O E O 15 O O E O E O A O A O A O E O A OO A O DOODODOODOODO e o a o e o e o a o e o a o 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Auto Refresh O Figure 4 9 12 QoS Statistics page screenshot 200 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Low Queue There are 4 QoS queues per port with strict or weighted queuing scheduling This is the lowest priority queue e Normal Queue This is the normal priority queue of the 4 QoS queues It has higher priority than the Low Queue e Medium Queue This is the medium priority queue of the 4 QoS queues It has higher priority than the Normal Queue e High Queue This is the highest priority queue of the 4 QoS queues e Receive Transmit The number of received and transmitted packets per port Buttons Click to refresh the page immediately Refresh Car Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh l Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 9 8 DSCP Remarking This page allows you to configure DSCP remarking related settings for each port Frames can be classified by 4 different Q
25. 24240 Series 6 6 VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN status of port1 SWITCH gt vlan configuration 1 VLAN Configuration Mode IEEE 802 1Q Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType Q in Q Mode Eth type Disable N A VLAV PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt none 376 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none default Show port VLAN ID Default Setting 1 Example Set PVID2 for port20 SWITCH gt vlan pvid 20 2 VLAN Frame Type Description Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged frames only default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All Example Set port20 that allow tagged frames only SWITCH gt vlan frametype 20 tagged VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable 377 User s Manual of
26. 435 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Security Network ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Default Setting 300 Example Show ACL action in port 1 SWITCH gt security network acl action 1 Port Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security Network ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax Security Network ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 Default Setting 1 Example 436 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Set ACL policy 2 for port 1 SWITCH gt security network acl policy 1 2 Security Network ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax Security Network ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt packet_rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter li
27. 44 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 2 2 Installing the Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step2 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 15 Figure 2 15 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4 and Specifications Step4 Connect the Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more information please see the Cabling Specifications in Appendix A 45 User s Manual of SGSW 24040
28. E SNS S SNS 2 2 E g lt l Z Z Q Q lt Z ES Q lt 2 ad 2 lt 2 lt lt SNS SS ISS I SES SSS SH Sy SS SHS SS SSS Z a 2 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e DSCP Remarking If the QoS remarking mode is set to enabled it should be with this DSCP Mode remarking correction function according to RFC2474 on this port e DSCP Queue Mapping Configure the mapping table between the queue and its DSCP value that is used for DSCP remarking if the DSCP value of incoming packets is not specified in RCF2474 Best Effort DSCP 0 CS1 DSCP 8 CS2 DSCP 16 202 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series CS3 DSCP 24 CS4 DSCP 32 CS5 DSCP 40 CS6 DSCP 48 CS7 DSCP 56 Expedite Forward DSCP 46 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 9 Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables the voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classifying and scheduling to network traffic It is recommands there are two VLANSs on a port one for voice one for data Before connect the IP device to the switch The IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be confi
29. NTP Mode Disabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 pool ntp org 2 europe pool ntp org 361 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 3 north america pool ntp org 4 asia pool ntp org 5 oceania pool ntp org IP NTP Mode Description Set or show the NTP mode Syntax IP NTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable NTP mode disable Disable NTP mode default Show NTP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable NTP mode SWITCH gt ip ntp mode enable IP NTP Server Add Description Add NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example To add NTP server SWITCH gt ip ntp server add 1 60 249 136 151 362 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IP NTP Server IPv6 Add Description Add NTP server IPv6 entry Syntax IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt server_ipv6 gt IPv6 server address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit gro
30. Redundant Power 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T PoE Managed Stackable Switch 220W IEEE 802 3af 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T PoE Managed Stackable Switch 380W IEEE 802 3af 24 Port 100 1000Base X with 8 Port Shared TP Managed Stackable Switch 24 Port 100 1000Base X with 8 Port Shared TP Managed Stackable Switch Redundant Power 24 Port 10 100 1000 Base T PoE Managed Stackable Switch 360W IEEE 802 3af at The term Managed Switch mentioned in this user s manual refers to SGSW Managed Switch series 1 1 Packet Contents The box should contain the following items M Managed Switch x 1 M User s manual CD x1 M Quick installation guide x 1 M 19 Rack mount accessory kit x1 M Power cord x1 M Rubber feet x4 M RS 232 DB9 male Console cable x1 M CB STX50 50cm stack cable x 1 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 20 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 1 2 Product Description Cost effective IPv6 Managed Gigabit Switch Solution for SMBs As the need for IP address increases the IPv4 network infrastructure is not capable enough to provide IP addresses to each single user Thus ISPs adopt the IPv6 protocol where more IP addresses can be utilized To meet the current trend PLANET has launched the IPv6 designed
31. SNMP v1 v2c and v3 switch management SSH SSL secure access Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events IPv6 IP Address NTP DNS management Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP DHCP Relay User Privilege levels control NTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management ICMPv6 gt Stacking Ml Hardware stack up to 16 units and 384 ports Stacking architecture supports Chain and Ring mode Mirror across stack Link Aggregation groups spanning multiple switches in a stack Hardware learning with MAC table synchronization across stack gt Redundant Power System SGSW 24040R 24240R 100 240V AC 48V DC Dual power redundant Active active redundant power failure protection Mi Backup of catastrophic power failure on one supply Fault tolerance and resilience 27 gt Power over Ethernet SGSW 24040P 24040P4 24040HP Only Ml Complies with IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet End Span PSE Complies with IEEE 802 3at high power Power over Ethernet End Span PSE SGSW 24040HP only Up to 24 ports for IEEE 802 3af devices powered Up to 24 ports for IEEE 802 3at devices powered SGSW 2
32. Security Switch SNMP User Add Description Add SNMPv3 user entry User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Source Mask 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 The entry index key are lt engineid gt and lt user_name gt and it doesn t allow modify Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Add lt engineid gt lt user_name gt MD5 SHA lt auth_password gt DES lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt lt user_name gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to md5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol sha An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase des An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES privacy protocol privacy protocol should belong to lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase Example Add SNMPv3 user entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp user add 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 md5 12345678 des abcdefgh 412 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Switch SNMP User Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry SWITC
33. Security Switch User Configuratio iei eian a EE ei aeeoa iii aidew eE 388 Sec rity Switch User Add rieien ane aa a atap niaaa A ana aada a aaia iaa i ataria 388 security Switch User Delete tt e aa Eat 389 Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration o ooccononcccnnoniconoccccnnnonnncnnnn cnn n nono nc nn no nr r nan rn rn 389 Security Switch Privilege Level GrOUP ooooccccnnonccnnocccinononcncnonancnn nono nnnn eniad iea aan rr rn 390 Security Switch Privilege Level Current ccccccccecesseenecseeceneessecenssouncendenceseesectesencoetesencense dei eaaa iaia iaaii 391 Security Switch Auth Configuration ooonoocccnnnnccnnoncccnononcnnnnnnnnnrnornnnnn nn n nr narrar 391 Security Switch Auth Method ai 392 Security Switch SSH Configuration ici ii oe ddr 393 Security SWitchSSH MOdE icioscisnoirocinnaciraas rotas renani eaaa ie aereas redada Neira 393 Security Switch HTTPs Configuration oooooconocccnnococcnnnoncncnonanano nono ncnn non rn nono nn nr n nn rre 394 Security Switch HT TPs Mode oa i a a aa eiad a e a a adai iaeei 394 Security Switch HTTPS Redirect aiana eee a e En Aaa A Aa EE E A NE a AEA AE ANAE 395 Security Switch Access Configuration ceca tiara ana 395 Security Switch ACCESS MOE ooooococcccconoconoconancnononononono breiir edia nr nn cnn errar rre rr ener 396 Security Switch Access Add ii oi 396 Security Switch Access IPVG Add iiciocinicicnnni ad REE odas 397 Security Switch Access Delete sasscsssgecsvsebec
34. Shows the VLAN entries configured by the administrator nas Shows the VLANs configured by NAS mvr Shows the VLANs configured by MVR voice_vlan Shows the VLANs configured by Voice VLAN all Shows all VLANs configuration 381 Example Show VLAN status SWITCH gt vlan lookup VLAN Status Description VLAN Port Configuration Status Syntax User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN Status lt port_list gt combined static nas mvr voice_vlan mstp all conflicts Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports combined combined VLAN Users configuration static static port configuration nas NAS port configuration mvr MVR port configuration voice_vlan Voice VLAN port configuration mstp MSTP port configuration all All VLAN Users configuration default combined VLAN Users configuration Default Setting Promiscous Example Show VLAN configuration of port10 SWITCH gt status 1 Port VLAN User Aware PVID Frame Type Static Enabled 1 Ing Filter Tx Tag UVID Conflicts 382 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series NAS MVR Voice VLAN MSTP Combined Enabled 1 All Disabled UntagThis 1 383 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 7 Private VLAN Configuration Command PVLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list g
35. Switch x The ACE applie to one specific Switch that stack together e Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE e Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped e Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port copy operation is disabled 211 e Logging User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter MAC Parameters The cou
36. _ north south west east meters floor coordinate_value Parameters latitude Latitude O to 90 degress with max 4 digits Positive numbers are north of the equator and negative numbers are south of the equator longitude Longitude 0 to 180 degress with max 4 digits Positive values are East of the prime meridian and negative numbers are West of the prime meridian altitude Altitude Meters or floors with max 4 digits default Show coordinate location configuration north south west east meters floor North North Valid for latitude South South Valid for latitude West West Valid for longitude East East Valid for longitude Meters Meters Valid for altitude Floor Floor Valid for altitude lldpmed Coordinate value coordinate_value lldpmed Coordinate value LLDPMED Datum Description Set or show LLDP MED Coordinates map datum Syntax LLDPMED Datum wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw Parameters wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw wgs84 WGS84 nad83_navd88 NAD83_NAVD88 nad83_mllw NAD83_MLLW lldpmed Coordinate datum 498 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series LLDPMED Fast Description Set or show LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Syntax LLDPMED Fast lt count gt Parameters lt count gt The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism defined by LLDP MED 1 10 LLDPMED Info Description Show
37. a Assign re assing Switch ID for each management purpose Step 1 linking the switches by CB STX50 stack cable Step 2 Check the Master LED of each SGSW switch to find out the Master Switch that is elected automatically by the stack operation Step 3 Use the Web browser such as IE 7 0 to login the Master Switch the default IP address is 192 168 0 100 Or you can use the PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to find out the IP address of the stack group e PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help O Refresh x Exit uc cies Pade 00 30 4F 76 27 10 SGS W 24040P 1 5b100623 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 PLANET SGSw 24040F Select Adapter 10 1 1 73 00 80 C6 FB 08 05 Y J Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All Connect to Device Device GS W 2404SF 00 30 4F 63 54 5C Get Device Information done Figure 4 17 11 Use PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to display the IP address of stack master Step 4 Choose Stack Stack Configuration from menu tree You can see the Stack had established automaticatlly As the below screen appears 1 The Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switches 2 All switches with same Priority value 3 3 The one can t be deleted is the Stack master Stack Configuration Switch ID Description Switch Type Stack Member e Capable Priority 00 30 4f 24 04 0a 1 v Yes 3 v SGSW 24010R PLANET SGSW 24040R Managed
38. any changes made locally will be undone 4 2 2 IP Configuration The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration DHCP Client O IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 1 VLAN ID 11 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP DNS Proxy Configuration Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration page screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation e IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation 69 e VLAN ID User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 e DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notatio
39. cusco odie cosa cade e dra le da e cala oe elas el eo e oie 496 LLDPMED Port Poli so ie ee ee E a es I 497 LLLDPMED Coordinates iii A ee ee E 498 EL DPMED Datum 2 iti cod a eee ae BAS oat A ade Edt ed ed 498 ILDPMEDF Stout cdas 499 LEDPMEDIIOfO cc00cctoco tono pio de cado cdo oros dando bd od o ee da dl dd e do ead ed e tl ed ond 499 LLDPMED Debuge Med transmit Vat iii dei 499 6 15 Power over Ethernet COMmMannd ccsccceseeeseeeeseeeeneeeeseaesesnaeenseeeesaesanaaeenseaeeeeeeseaesaseaeeneeeeseeeseeaenenenees 500 POE Configuration ripio 500 POE Mode tirita A AR 501 POE Pri A ence da 501 POE Mamagement Mode edad 502 POE Maximum POWerivctoioiina A 503 PoE Alloc ted POWeT oscar a 503 PoE Power SUPP N aa A A A he tae E TEE EEE E ae a ate 504 POE MUS A A a ia 504 6 16 Quality of Service Command conmmcincccnccconnnecnnnrr nunen nnmnnn nnana nnn 505 QoS Configuration oi dai 505 QOS las comic ion 505 QOS Det ico aa aaa E E aR Ea ARE Ai AAE EER AEAEE AERIENE 506 Slo e Tag PHONY mica EE EAEE ATE T A AE 506 QOS QCL Port a 507 QOS OCIA o EAA E e e E E SEE S E E EE E EEE AA E E E 507 QOS OCL Deletes coi 508 QoS OGL LOOKUP EATE E A S A E A E EATA E NAT 509 QoS Mode 0 N oe en eee ee seit 509 QOS WIG isc 2 or isdesg lia iaa tcs a 509 QOS Rate Lite reacia ias aria 510 Elo atelat ee EA N eect ckds tested E E art el he ace ndo 510 QoS Storm Unicas di de asa 511 QoS Strom Multicast ssi ii laos 511 QoS Strom Broadcastrir igeni do 512
40. e AF AT Mode Ther are two modes for PoE mode SGSW 24040HP only 802 3af enable IEEE 802 3af PoE function Per port maximum value must less than 15 4 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value if current PoE mode is 802 3af 802 3at disable IEEE 802 3at high power PoE function Per port maximum value must less than 30 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value if current PoE mode is 802 3at e Priority The Priority represents the ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires uses more power than power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off starting from the port with the lowest port number e Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delived to a remote device Per port maximum value must less than 15 4 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value if current PoE mode is 802 3af Per port maximum value must less than 30 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value if current PoE mode is 802 3at Once power overload detected the port will auto shut down and keep on detection mode until PD s power consumption lower than the power limit value The SGSW 24040HP did not have this parameter e Power A
41. lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 450 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries SWITCH gt security network ip source guard status Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Description Show ARP inspection configuration Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Example Show ARP inspection configuration SWITCH gt security network arp inspection configuration Security Network ARP Inspection Mode Description Set or show ARP inspection mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable ARP Inspection disable Disable ARP Inspection Default Setting disable Example Enable ARP inspection mode SWITCH gt security network arp inspection mode enable 451 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode Description Set or show the ARP Inspection port mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable ARP Inspection port disable Disable ARP Inspection port default Show ARP Inspection port mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable the ARP inspection mode of port 1 SWITCH gt security network arp inspection port mode 1 Security Network ARP Inspection Entry
42. received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAccClientExt The number of malformed Responses MalformedRespons RADIUS packets received es from the server Malformed 254 Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Tx Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Requests Retransmissions Pending Requests Timeouts radiusAcctClientExt BadAuthenticators radiusAccClientExt UnknownTypes radiusAccClientExt PacketsDropped radiusAccClientExt Requests radiusAccClientExt Retransmissions radiusAccClientExt PendingRequests radiusAccClientExt Timeouts User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decr
43. 02 0800 Previous Restart Cold SID Software Version 1 1 5b100623 SWITCH gt System Name Description Set or show the system name 346 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt System name or clear to clear System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign Example To set device title Switch gt System name SGSW 24040 LAB System Contact Description Set or show the system contact Syntax System Contact lt contact gt Parameters lt contact gt System contact string Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI Default Setting empty Example To set device contact Switch gt System contact SGSW 24040 Test System Location Description Set or show the system location Syntax System Location lt location gt 347 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt location gt System location string Use clear or to clear the string In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact Default Setting empty Example To set device location Switch gt System location
44. 1 2 4 8 QoS Rate Limiter Description Set or show the port rate limiter Syntax QoS Rate Limiter lt port_list gt enable disable lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable rate limiter disable Disable rate limiter default Show rate limiter mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps rate limiter for port17 24 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt qos rate limiter 17 24 enable 1000 QoS Shaper Description Set or show the port shaper Syntax QoS Shaper lt port_list gt enable disable lt bit_rate gt 510 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable shaper disable Disable shaper default Show shaper mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps shaper for port 9 16 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt qos shaper 9 16 enable 1000 QoS Storm Unicast Description Set or show the unicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable unicast storm control disable Disable unicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default
45. 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States E Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below 223 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Authentication server Authentication server RADIUS Server TACACS Server Authenticator Internet PLANET 802 1X aware Switch Intra p de oad Supplicant C Client with 802 1X authentication Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in th
46. 4 6 12 appears VLAN Membership Configuration for Switch 1 Start from WLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Port Members Add new entry Figure 4 6 12 VLAN overlap port setting amp VLAN 1 The public area member assign 5 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 8 configuration as the following screen in Figure 4 6 13 O O a a Tis p a n Figure 4 6 13 The configuration of VLAN Trunk port That is although the VLAN 2 members Port 1 to Port 3 and VLAN 3 members Port 4 to Port 6 also belongs to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN 6 Repeat Step 1 to 5 setup the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeat Step 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs 4 6 10 3 Port Isolate The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports and the each PCs are not able to access each other PCs of each isolate port But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer The screen in Figure 4 6 14 appears This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolate port 147 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Promiscuous Public Servers Pior iiscuous SGSW 24040 wry a 27 S999 VLAN 1 Private VLAN VLAN 2 Pri
47. Add lt access_id gt lt start_ip_addr gt lt end_ip_addr gt web snmpltelnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ip_addr gt Start IP address a b c d lt end_ip_addr gt End IP address a b c d web WEB HTTPS interface 396 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series snmp SNMP interface telnet TELNET SSH interface default Show configured and current mode Example Add access management list from 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 0 200 via web interface SWITCH gt security switch access add 1 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 200 web Security Switch Access IPv6 Add Description Add access management IPv6 entry Syntax Security Switch Access lpv6 Add lt access_id gt lt start_ipv6_addr gt lt end_ipv6_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ipv6_addr gt Start IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt end_ipv6_addr gt End IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each f
48. All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames 567 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiF
49. Gigabit Ethernet Switch SGSW Managed Switch series It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions With easy and friendly management interfaces and plenty of management functions included the SGSW Managed Switch series is the best choice for ISPs to build the IPv6 FTTx edge service and for SMBs to connect with IPv6 network High Performance Cost effective Telecom class Gigabit Solution for Enterprise Backbone and Data Center Networking PLANET Managed Switch is a L2 L4 Managed Gigabit Switch Since Gigabit network interface has become the basic equipment and requirement of Enterprise and Network Servers with 48Gbps switching fabric the Managed Switch can handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to a backbone or high capacity servers The powerful QoS and Network Security features meet the needs of effective data traffic control for both Campuses and Enterprises such as VoIP video streaming and multicast applications High Performance The Managed Switch provides 24 10 100 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports with 4 shared Gigabit SFP slots It boasts a high performance switch architecture that is capable of providing non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 48Gbps which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to increase bandwidth demands Robust Layer 2 Features The Managed Switch can be programmed for basic switch management functions such as port speed configur
50. HPLIJ1320 3 Hide icons for networked UPnP devices Other Places Desktop Entire Network My Computer E My Documents O Ga Ly Printers and Faxes enm on 10 1 1 20 enmg on File ENM_Public on 10 1 1 20 ENM_Public on file Details fae on 10 1 1 26 FAE on planet m FAE_Fileson10 1 1 26 FileMKT_Public on file Y NNEC WOrk Figure 4 2 10 UPnP devices shows on Windows My Network Places 4 2 8 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options m Circuit ID option 1 E Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit 78 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_n
51. IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch please use the procedures as follows E Show the current IP address 1 On Switch gt prompt enter ip configuration 2 The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway as shown in Figure 5 2 COM1 115200band Tera Term YI File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help SGSH WGSH 24040 Boot loader ee Be built Aug 19 2008 RAM 2x00000000 4x040000 FLASH lacada ESOO 256 blocks of x 0Q10000 bytes each mem Testing 0x0002c340 0x03f e1000 omplete no errors fis load managed go Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers SGSHW 24040P ST2 ST1 1 21 41 6l 8l 1101121141161 1181201221241 11 3231 Sl 71 91111131151 1171191211231 1211 1221 1231 1241 admin Logi n in progress SWITCH ip conf igurat ion IP Configuration AUT CONFIG mode ink Local Address febo 230 9f1f e76 2710 Figure 5 2 Show IP information screen a Configure IP address 3 On Switch gt prompt enter the following command and press lt Enter gt as shown in Figure 5 3 Switch gt ip setup 192 168 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 1 The previous command would apply the follow
52. IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 8 appears QCE Configuration QCE Type Ethernet Type Value Traffic Class VLAN ID TCP UDP Port DSCP Tos Tag Priority Figure 4 9 8 QCE Configuration page screenshot 194 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Description e QCE Type Select the available type for the specific QCE Ethernet Type Matches the received frame s EtherType against the QCE Key VLAN ID Matches the frame s VID against the QCE Key TCP UDP Port Matches the destination port and the source port against the QCE Key DSCP Matches the received IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value 6 bits against the two DSCP values in the QCE Key ToS Uses the precedence part of the IPv4 IPv6 ToS 3 bits as an index to the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key Tag Priority Uses the User Priority value 3 bits as an index to the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key e Type Value Configure the values according to the QCE type you select Ethernet Type The allowed values for this type range from 0x600 1536 to OxFFFF 65535 VLAN ID The allowed values for this type range from 1 to 4095 TCP UDP Port Range Specify whether there is a range or a specific port number The port range allowed is from 0 to 65535 DSCP The allowed
53. LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation 4 ports aggregate up to 4Gbps Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregation 116 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned t
54. MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MDS is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port 559 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate with
55. MSTI Mapping VLANs Mapped Figure 4 7 11 MSTI Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Configuration Identification Object Description e Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping Object Description 164 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configure
56. Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Advanced Settings Object Description e Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs e Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology e Port Error Recovery e Port Error Recovery Timeout Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implements the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol When Compatibles mode is selected the system uses the RSTP 802 1w to compatible and co work with another STP 802 1d s BPDU control packet Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 3 Bridge S
57. Model Level default_ro_group any NodAuth NoPriv 418 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 2 default_rw_group any NodAuth NoPriv Number of entries 2 Security Network Psec Switch Description Show Port Security status Syntax Security Network Psec Switch lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 800007e5017f000001 Example Show port security status SWITCH gt security network psec switch Users L Limit Control 8 802 1X D DHCP Snooping V Voice VLAN Port Users State MAC Cnt No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users oO O O O O O O O O No users 419 No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users ooooeoeoqoeo0eoeeoeoeoeoes90eoeoeoeoeoo O No users Security Network Psec Port Description Show MAC Addresses learned by Port Security Syntax Security Network Psec Port lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show MAC address learned on port 1 SWITCH gt security network psec port 1 MAC Address VID State Added 420 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Age Hold Time User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Network Limit Configuration Description
58. O E O E O 500000000000000000000000 Ob O M3 O MN O M2 O M3 O 1 O MEN O MEN O a O ME O MN O OE O E O El O El O E O E O EN O E O EN O EN oe O Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Global Counters Object Description e Neighbor entries were Shows the time for when the last entry was last deleted or added It is also shows last changed at the time elapsed since last change was detected e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Entries Added e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Entries Deleted 308 e Total Neighbors Entries Dropped User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full e Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Local Counters Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object Description e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port e Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port e Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error e Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s intern
59. Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show ACL Configuration SWITCH gt security network acl configuration ACL Configuration Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 434 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Rate Limiter Rate 1 1 Security Network ACL Action Description Set or show the ACL port default action
60. Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policer Enabled Enable or disable the port policer The default value is Disabled e Policer Rate Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps e Policer Unit Configure the unit of measure for the port policer rate as kbps or Mbps The 198 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series default value is kbps e Shaper Enabled Enable or disable the port shaper The default value is Disabled e Shaper Rate Configure the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps e Shaper Unit Configure the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps 4 9 6 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There three types of storm rate control E Unicast storm rate control E Multicast storm rate control E Broadcast storm rate control The rate is 2 n where n is equal to or less than 15 or No Limit The unit of the rate can be either pps packets per second or kpps kilopackets per second The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or
61. Q in Q VLAN Tunnel The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced VLAN Port Configuration The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears 131 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN Port Configuration for Switch 1 Mode EEE 80210 y Ingress Acceptable E apes Set out layer LAN port pvp Filtering Frame Type Link Type Q in Q Mode tag ether
62. QoS DSCP Remarking for port 1 4 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt qos dscp remarking 1 4 enable QoS DSCP Queue Mapping Description Set or show the default port priority Syntax QoS DSCP Queue Mapping lt port_list gt lt class gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 lt dscp gt QoS DSCP Remarking Value 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 46 6 17 Mirror Command Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting disable Example Show mirror configuration User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt mirror configuration Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port Default Setting Mirror Port 1 Example Set port 2 for the mirror port SWITCH gt mirror port 2 514 Mirror SID Description Set or show the mirror switch ID Syntax Mirror SID lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Default Setting 1 Example Set SID2 for mirror switch ID User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt mirror sid 2 Mi
63. QoS DSGP REMarking T E aa 513 QoS DSCP Queue Mapa a i 513 6 17 Mirror COMMON iii 514 Mirror Configuration iiin a deatied th aod Sib a a i sieved aioe a aaa a e ea ii 514 Mirror POI aA EE E E E E E E E E E E E 514 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Mirror Di daa 515 Mirror Mod e E a a a a a E EEE AnA a RE En E ENT E ESE 515 6 18 Configuration Command ssssssssseusseunneunnunnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne nanne nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn 517 Configuration Saves iii A a a tenes e a dat 517 Contiguratlorn Kor 1o PASEI AE EE E E E E A E A EA chaste A 517 6 19 Firmware COMMAN s ccesccesccessecsecnecestecesscacennececeaeeedececuancesceceddeeeteseceaettaueduedeestasenaeueceecedsedetsnenedeecende 518 Fitmware LOad Mii A At 518 Firmware IPV6 Load iii ica 518 6 20 UPnP Command iin tices E E ented sheets cade E E E 519 UPnP Configuration dba 519 UPRPIMOde sossscioccomrespata re IAS ade leido q de elec dan de el ie e le ASEAN dde eden e elo dao dre 519 UPA TL A A o id No 520 UPNP Advertising Duration wis nics navn dein see ee aes nn eed 520 6 21 MYR Commie ins aniseed is 521 MVR Configuration iaa 521 MVIRGrOupi ct cis a pi 522 A nean an A nce RN ins dt ad ha RN CoG nt Sel eet aod ls MRE ond 522 MV RiMOde id eek ah O ON ee ed ae re Aaa i cra 522 MVR Port Modei eeit e a e e Ad 523 MYR Multicast VAN a e a a cae eden it et spied aaae a E 523 MVR POr Ty POs nerne edad a rO ae e Aee e tada 524 MVR Immed
64. Rx Request Tx Request Rx Decline Tx Decline Rx ACK Tx ACK Tx NAK Tx Release Tx Inform Tx Lease Query Tx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Active Rx NAK Rx Release Rx Inform Rx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active E p O 13 El O 8 O 3 O 8 O 5 o o Figure 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen page screenshot 277 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Lease The nu
65. SGSW Switch fails in a stack stack integrity is maintained if the redundant cable is connected to the stack The affected switch within the sack can be replaced or removed without disrupting normal operation The broken link is bypassed and data transmission continues uninterrupted The single management IP address for the stack is also preserved for uninterrupted management and monitoring 331 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ENEN NUS Solsutte VJ Da y POWER S 30 602 Ca SS EN VPN S b Figure 4 17 4 Remove or Replace a switch from the stack 4 17 1 4 Shortest Path Forwarding The SGSW Swtich supports shortest path forwarding technology to optimal data flow across the stack The advantage of shortest path forwarding as below E Automatic Loop Prevention Using Time To Live TTL information in the stack header NW Utilize all stack links in the ring SGSW Switch 1 Load per stack link cL TD SGSW Switch 2 SGSW Switch 3 Figure 4 17 5 True Ring Topology 332 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 17 2 Stack Configuration This page is used for configure the stack include assign Switch ID master priority and display the current stack member information The screen in Figure 4 17 Gappears Stack Configuration Delete Stack Membe
66. Setting disable Example Enable CDP aware finction for port1 4 SWITCH gt Ildp cdp_aware 1 4 enable 493 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 14 LLDPMED Command LLDPMED Configuration Description Show LLDP MED configuration Syntax LLDPMED Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP MED configuration of port1 4 SWITCH gt Ildpmed configuration 1 4 LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeast Count 4 Location Coordinates Latitude 0 0000 North Longitude 0 0000 East Altitude 0 0000 meter s Map datum WGS84 Civic Address Location Policies none none none none LLDPMED Civic Description Set or show LLDP MED Civic Address Location 494 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax LLDPMED Civic country state county city district block street leading_street_direction trailing_street_suffix str_suf house_no house_no_s uffix landmark additional_info name zip_code building apartment floor room_number place_type postal_com_name p_o box additional_code lt civic_value gt Parameters country Country state National subdivisions state caton region province prefecture county County parish gun JP district IN city City townchip shi JP district City division borough city district ward chou JP block Neighborhood block street Stree
67. Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control M4 priority queues on all switch ports Ml Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS TOS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets IP TCP UDP port number Typical network application Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Supports QoS and In Out bandwidth control on each port Traffic policing policies on the switch port QoS Control List Wizard makes QoS creation and configuration easier and more quickly DSCP remarking gt Multicast M Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 Querier mode support Hi IGMP Snooping port filtering Hi Multicast VLAN Registration MVR support gt Security WM IEEE 802 1x Port based MAC based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers TACACS login users access authentication RADIUS TACACS users access authentication IP Based Access Control List ACL MAC Based Access Control List Source MAC IP address binding DHCP Snooping to filter un trusted DHCP messages Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks Auto DoS rule to defend DoS attack IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder 26 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series gt Management Hi Switch Management Interfaces Console Telnet Command Line Interface Web switch management
68. Solution 1 AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord If the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 548 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power E while IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 2 e PLANET SGSW 24240 Stack ID Networking amp Communication STX2 Console STX1 oo y Master Y o A o 115200 N 8 1 A Reset 549 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series APPENDIX A A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T 1 BI_DA BI_DB 2 BI_DA BI_DB 3 BI_DB BI_DA 4 BI_DC BI_DD 5 BI_DC BI_DD 6 BI_DB BI_DA 7 BI_DD BI_DC 8 BI_DD BI_DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switc
69. Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module the speed value or description is get from the SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might shows different speed information e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is get from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are the matched while the fiber connection is failed e Distance m Display the supports distance of current SFP module the distance value is get from the SFP module Buttons ri Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 112 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 4 5 Port Mirroring Configuration Configure port Mirroring on this page This function monitors network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection in
70. Syntax STP Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Enable Enable MSTP protocol Disable Disable MSTP protocol Default Enable Example Disable STP function on port1 SWITCH gt stp port mode 1 disable STP Port Edge Description Set or show the STP adminEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port Edge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge Disable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non edge Default Enable Example Disable STP edge function on port1 SWITCH gt sip port edge 1 disable 467 STP Port AutoEdge Description Set or show the STP autoEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port AutoEdge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Enable MSTP autoEdge Disable Disable MSTP autoEdge Default enable Example Disable STP edge function on port1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt sip port autoedge 1 disable STP Port P2P Description Set or show the STP point2point port parameter Syntax STP Port P2P lt port_list gt enable disable auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP point2point disable Disable MSTP point2point auto Automat
71. The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears LLDPMED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fasten repeat count Coordinates Location Civic Address Location oy Cai Bac igor ee emigraci n Trang sees Sweet sux C howeno C Hn sti Additional location info A roomno Emergency Call Service Policies Add new policy Policy Port Configuration for Switch 1 Figure 4 14 2 LLDPMED Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to 297 Coordinates Location User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only tr
72. The destination IPv6 Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets 312 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 3 appears Remote IP Ping Test Remote IP Address toe Ping Button Result pa pa pa pa pa pa pa 0 0 oo Ek UN 23 SEES D e n e a pa q pa _ mu ol _ da u N pa LL N N pA N 05 y 12 e Ping E E 313 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics This page is
73. The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Description Display per port description e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair Buttons Download Download the diagnostics Start Click to run the diagnostics Print Print out the cable diagnostics information 315 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 16 Power over Ethernet SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 SGSW 24040HP Providing up to 24 PoE in line power interfaces the SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040HP PoE Switch can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP Camera system AP group for the enterprise For instance 24 cameras APs can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office Without the power socket limitation the PoE Switch makes the installation of cameras or WLAN AP easier and more efficient Only the SGSW 24040HP has IEEE 802 3at mode and supplies a maximum power of up to 30 8 watts Note SGSW 24040HP for Switch 1 Power Over Ethernet Status Current Power Consumption EE A Y J 270 5 360 W Total Power Reserved HE Y 271 6 3501 Temperature 1 33 0 91 F Temperature 2 32 0 90 F Local Port PD Class Power Used W Current Used ma Priority Port Status AT AF Mode PoE ON PoE Ol PoE ON PoE Ol PoE ON PoE
74. The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Example Set SNMP trap IPv6 destination address for 2001 0001 SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap ipv6 destination 2001 0001 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure Description Set or show the SNMP authentication failure trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap authentication failure disable Disable SNMP trap authentication failure default Show SNMP trap authentication failure mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap authentication failure SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap authentication failure disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up Description Set or show the port link up and link down trap mode 406 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap link up and link down disable Disable SNMP trap link up and link down default Show SNMP trap link up and link down mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap link up SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap link up disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode Description Set or
75. Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 6 11 appears eee m o mo e a P N PC 2 PC 3 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged m E VLAN 2 VLAN 3 p T o momo mm sa a a a a a a a a a a a a D a D O O a a a a N T nn l l I l l l I l I ae PC 1 i PC 4 Untagged Untagged l a 4 a e ee e Tee e e e e e e e e Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 24 146 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series About the VLAN ports connect to the hosts please refer to 4 6 10 1 examples The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk port configuration 1 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port N Assign Port 8 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration page 3 Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members gt Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN which wants to be aggregated At this sample add Port 8 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port The screen in Figure
76. User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series MGB SX LX sr 1000Base SX LX Y O LC Fiber SS gs Figure 2 18 Plug in the SFP transceiver Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceivers The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Ml MGB SX SFP 1000BASE SX SFP transceiver Multi mode 850nm 220m 550m Ml MGB LX SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver Single mode 1310nm 10km Ml MGB L30 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver Single mode 1310nm 30km Ml MGB L50 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver Single mode 1310nm 50km Ml MGB LA10 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver WDM Single mode TX 1310nm RX 1550nm 10km Ml MGB LB10 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver WDM Single mode TX 1550nm RX 1310nm 10km lt is recommended to use PLANET SFPs on the Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it Before connecting the other Managed Switches workstation or Media Converter 1 Make sure both sides of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX Check whether the fiber optic cable type matches the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the Multi mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type gt To
77. User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 7 SWITCH OPERATION 7 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 7 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and a
78. Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security e State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page e MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Button
79. a iia 74 4 2 0 NTP COnPQUPATION lt cccoircitan site einen eaaa eare init 76 4 2 f URNP ContiguratiON caia tai 77 4 2 8 DHCP Relay coreene eie e ca a diac de gees sine ida 78 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics iseia na aa E ii ec 80 AD AO CPW a e eat de eno callo ds 82 e SO A O OA 83 4 2 12 Detailed Lo a anes 84 4 2 13 Remote SYSIOG voii Atila 85 A DAA SMTP CONGUE eran l phwnt open aug abe reac base dete have aaa ae A a a eaaa eaea etai Raat 86 4 2 15 Web Firmware Update A Rd 87 42 16 TFTP Firmware Upgrade iiiver ie aeii a i ae dee dun etnleedd Guleeetadites aa iri 88 42 17 Configuration Backup aii ia 89 4 2 18 Configuration Upldad vicio ia io ii 91 4 2 19 Factory De Ati 92 4 220 System Reboot sci hence eae a ee A Meet 93 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol ccssecceseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeaseeeeeeeeescaesaseeeenseaeeeeeeeseaeseseeeenes 94 4 3 1 SNMP OVGIVIGW cian A ba ii beta 94 43 2 SNMP System COmMGQuration israiska renani rr a EE a AA EEEE a reene iii cane 95 4 3 3 SNMP System Information Configuration ooononcccnnnococononocnnononcncnanonnnn nono nc nn nono nn nano nn nr nn nn nan nn nn rr nan nn rn nnn nn nn nn nnnnnns 96 4 3 4 SNMP Trap Configuration icon iaa 97 4 3 5 5NMPy3 Configuration ccoo Roca 99 4 3 5 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration oonoocccnnnociccnnnocnnononcnnnononcnc nano nnnn nono rca nan n nr EAEE rre nnn narrar rra rr 99 4 3 5 2 SNMPv3 Users Configuration ec ceeccee
80. address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Adding Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 275 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 8 appears DHCP Snooping Configuration Stack Global Settings Snooping Model psu Y Port Mode Configuration for Switch 1
81. and functionality as needed The stacking technology also enables the advantages of chassis based switches to be integrated into the SGSW Managed Switch series at a low cost AC DC Power Redundant to ensure continuous operation The SGSW 24040R SGSW 24240R Managed Switch is equipped with one 100 240V AC power supply unit and one DC 48V power supply unit in its standard package It provides redundant power supply installation A redundant power system is also provided to enhance the reliability with either 100 240V AC power supply unit or 48V DC power supply unit The continuous power systems are specifically designed to handle the demands of high tech facilities requiring the highest power integrity available Advanced Features and Centralized Power Management for Enterprise and Campus PoE Networking PoE Model PLANET SGSW 24040P PoE Switch series provides 24 10 100 1000Mbps Power over Ethernet PoE IEEE 802 3af compliant ports which optimize the installation and power management of network devices such as wireless access points AP Voice over IP VoIP phones and security video cameras The PoE capabilities also help to reduce deployment costs for network devices like the wireless AP as a result of freeing from restrictions of power outlet locations Power and data switching are integrated into one unit and delivered over a single cable It thus eliminates cost for additional AC wiring and 22 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Serie
82. and remove specify ports from VLAN 1 member It s import to remove the VLAN members from VLAN 1 configuration Or the ports would become overlap setting About the overlapped VLAN configuration see next VLAN configure sample Assign PVID for each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 PVID 3 Port 7 Port 24 PVID 7 Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports Link Type Port 3 VLAN 2 and Port 6 VLAN 3 The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 10 appears 144 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN Port Configuration for Switch 1 IEEE 80210 y po pvm Firing eramenmo Unktvve imonode Re Disable 802 10 Tag Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Z3 y S 3 ka ka ka UnTag v 8 INIA UnTag H x A Aly an y an y an wi an Y an y an y an y AL AL Aly Aly GI SI SI SI SI SI SII SII SI SI SGI SI SI SI SI S MESM ESH EH EA E EH EH EA EA ENEH EH EA EA E MEMES MESSE EEE MEETS wn O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O fa Figure 4 6 10 Port 1 Port 6 VLAN Configuration 145 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch The most cases are used for
83. and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP Switch IDs 1 16 are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack The Switch ID of each switch is shown on the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers 565 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The TCP protocol guarantees re
84. be noticed New Object User xi e Create in ca test pc Users First name test Initials Last name Full name test User logon name test ca test pe v User logon name pre Windows 2000 Figure 4 11 16 Add User Properties screen New Object User Create in ca test pcLlsers Password eseses Confirm password eseees User must change password at next logon JV User cannot change password JV Password never expires Account is disabled lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 17 Add User Properties screen 261 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is an uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X is called to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server 4 11 10 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Go to St
85. belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocol are None None authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication Password protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 100 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are None None privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed strin
86. broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 11 appears Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Rate pps Unicast g 1 v Multicast O 1 v Broadcast O 1 xj Figure 4 9 11 Storm Control Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here unicast multicast broadcast e Status Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 199 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 7 QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 12 appears Queuing Counters for Switch 1 0 0 0 0 0 mn Nh o 1 2 3 4 3 6 fa 8 El O 11 12 13 14 15 16 ie 18 9 E oo a o e o a o a o a o a o a o a o a o e o a o a oo G o a o 0 0 0 0 e o e o a o 0c o 00 0 0000 lO fee O El O ee O 3 O E O El O ee O E O E O E O ee
87. build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class I also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class l LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class l definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class 1 and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product catego
88. care e IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation e SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation e DIP Filter Specif
89. clear the system log Syntax System Log lt log_id gt all info warninglerror clear Parameters lt log_id gt System log ID or range default All entries all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Show errors clear Clear log Example To show system log Switch gt system log Number of entries 350 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Level Time Message Switch just made a cold boot Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 04 0000 Link up on port 10 351 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 2 Stack Stack List Description Show the list of switches in stack Syntax Stack List detailed productinfo Parameters detailed productinfo Show product information Example Show the stack list Distance Master Stack Member SID Type Port25 Port26 Prio Time 00 30 4f 76 27 10 00 17 57 SWITCH gt Stack Master Priority Description Set the master election priority Syntax Stack Master Priority lt sid gt local lt mst_elect_prio gt Parameters lt sid gt local Switch ID 1 16 or local switch lt mst_elect_prio gt Master election priority 1 4 1 gt Highest master probability Example Set the master election priority Switch gt stack master priority 1 1 Switch gt 352 Stack Master Reelect Description Force master reelection ignoring master time Syntax Stack
90. connect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the Single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Connecting the fiber cable Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable to the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media 49 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails When working with some fiber NICs or Media Converters setting the Link mode to 1000 Force is needed m Removing the transceiver module 1 Make sure there is no network activity by consulting or checking with the network administrator or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance 2 Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently 3 Turn the handle of the MGB module to the horizontal position 4 Pull out the module gently through the handle Figure 2 19 Pull out the SFP transceiver Never pull out the module without pulling the handle or the push bolts on the module Directly pulling out the module with force could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed Switch 2 2 4 Connecting DC Power Supply SGSW 24040R 24240R The SGSW 24040R supports 48V
91. create specific QCEs QoS Control Entries automatically First select the QCL ID for these QCEs and then select the traffic class Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected qos qclapp qos msg qclappqce qos msg qclappfirst qos msg qclappdiff QCL ID 1 wi iw Goce Wi Figure 4 9 4 Set up Typical Network Application Rules page 2 screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCLID Select the QCL ID to which these QCEs apply e Traffic Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE Buttons Cancel Wizard Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step Next Click to continue the wizard 4 9 2 3 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets The Set up ToS Precedence Mapping screen in Figure 4 9 5 appears 190 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets o aD ToS Precedencel Class ToS Precedence1 Class ToS Precedence2 Class lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt iW Figure 4 9 5 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCLID Select
92. do e AO e E 330 4 17 1 2 Master Elec coin tribal EER riea IN 331 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 17 13 Stack REGUNAGANCY iii e acia 331 4 17 1 4 Shortest Path Forwarding caisean a na eaae AERE Aaa AE scene ERAEN A A E AETERNE 332 417 2 Stack Configura segoii ei e aaa a aa o eaa a a areas aiaa 333 e AER e Anola aeeie a a EEEE EE TTT E E TOT ATE 336 4 17 4 Stack Port State DveWieW 0 00 in 337 41 00 Stack Example A a id aos 337 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE wvssciscisscissetssctscetecctscedscctevedscctuvedsccduvedsccduvedsccdusedscctuvedsicievedess 341 5 1HACCESSING the CL id 341 logon to th Console ii a en eee 341 Configure P AddreSS viii ais 342 5 2 Telnet Login a ee acs eee cea Teak Sentech eh ceaee cee cease EEEE cashed ate dence a E AAAA EEEN 344 6 Command Ene Modena 345 6 System Commandin ica in sodas se cdevansercaueddocdsvenccectecdegundcvadseccacuecuuetevid etuatequterec 346 System Configuration esegi eie ida 346 SN a a ade a e hae vee eee a a ieai 346 system Contacts gis cite a a E cie 347 S stem Location snn e a ee send o eaaa a e e cis 347 SYSTEM TIMEZONE O 348 System Prompte nape p e i ed E en E a ee ee es 348 System Reborn 349 System Restore Defdlltaicocionio sir oir 349 System LO iii A daa 350 SYSTEM LOG een tee ee i on ee ole el ee 350 G22 Stak A ae ahiscsduealing Rete ET E E E E aated E Gamat aie A 352 Stack List uch ane aa ei eS A ee 352 Stack Master Priority icon ado 3
93. e VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of O represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 e DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration applies 302 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Policy ID The set of policies that shall apply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons _ Add new policy click to add new policy Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row f
94. has IEEE 802 3at mode and supplies a maximum Power of up to 30 8 watts 4 16 3 Port Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings as the screen in Figure 4 16 3 appears for Switch 1 Power Over Ethernet Configuration Ethernet Port Configuration Port PoE Mode Schedule AF AT Mode Priority Maximum Power W Power Allocation W Profile 30 8 30 8 oE Mo Enable 802 3at High 1802 3at v High 802 3at High 802 3at High 802 3at High 802 3at High 802 3at High High 802 3at High 02 3at v High High High High High High High High High v High High High High oon onk WN lelle lell Je lelelelelelelelelelelelelel NS SS IS HSH SS SSS IS SHES IS SSS IES v ej lo v v v j b v v v v v v v wj lo w v y v v User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Figure 4 16 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e PoE Mode There are three modes for PoE mode Enable enable PoE function Disable disable PoE function Schedule enable PoE function in schedule mode e Schedule Indicates the schedule profile mode Possible porifles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4
95. includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normaly it descript which vendor telephony device The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 206 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 10 Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to c
96. more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports 152 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of areceived BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Defaul
97. number of valid EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch e Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Direction Name IEEE Name Description 241 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Access Challenges Other Requests Auth Successes Auth Failures 242 dot1xAuthBackendAcce ssChallenges dot1xAuthBackendOther Requests ToSupplicant dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes dot1xAuthBackendAuth Fails 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the
98. operation When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When enable DHCP relay Policy information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under 79 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4 2 12 appears DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Transmit Receive from Receive Missing Agent Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad Server
99. range is O to 63 ToS or Tag Priority do not have type value settings e Traffic Class Buttons Save Click to save changes Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE If the QCE type is ToS or Tag Priority there are 8 rows of traffic class that can be configured for each priority Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 4 9 4 Port QoS Configuration This page allows you to configure QoS settings for each port e Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High e The classification is controlled by a QCL that is assigned to each port 195 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e AQCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs e Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class e This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority e Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS class for the port e The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The Port QoS Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears Port QoS Configuration Stack Global Settings Settings for Switch 1 Ingress Configuration Egress Configuration ae Default Class QCL Tag Priority Queuing Mode Tow Strict St
100. ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled 249 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an
101. settings for the Switch 342 IP 192 168 0 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 0 253 VLAN ID 1 COM1 115200baud Tera Term YI File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ia 24040 Bootloader v1 0 built Aug 19 2008 R 00000 1x04000000 FLASH 282000000 x8080000 0 256 blocks of x Q1 0 bytes each memtes Testing 0x0002c340 0x03fe10001 Completed no errors fis load managed 21 41 61 8l 1101121141161 1 11 31 SI 71 91111131151 admin in in progress SGSW 2404 P 8T2 l T1 1181201221241 1171191211231 1211 1221 1231 1241 L SWITCH gt ip setup 192 168 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 1 SWHITCH gt E 4 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed Figure 5 3 Set IP address screen If the IP address is successfully configured the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of SGSW Managed Switch through the new IP address console to get the help description If you are not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter help anytime in You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain c
102. shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled e Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE 2 Yl 3 83 gt on Click to save changes ct Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone el g E Click to clear the counters 220 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate pps lt m f oe l 2 3 4 5 jl 6 1 7 8 9 lolas i S a N E q p p ee lt lt lt lt j lt n Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter 1D for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 221 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 11 Authenticat
103. source being utilized by a PSE or PD device If the device is a PSE device it can either run on its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source If it is unknown whether the PSE device is using its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source it is indicated as Unknown If the device is a PD device it can either run on its local power supply or it can use the PSE as power source It can also use both its local power supply and the PSE If it is unknown what power supply the PD device is using it is indicated as Unknown e Priority Power Priority represents the priority of the PD device or the power priority associated with the PSE type device s port that is sourcing the power There are three levels of power priority The three levels are Critical High and Low 326 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series If the power priority is unknown it is indicated as Unknown e Power The Power Value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts required by a PD device from a PSE device or the minimum power a PSE device is capable of sourcing over a maximum length cable based on its current configuration The maximum allowed value is 102 3 W If the device indicates value higher than 102 3 W it is represented as reserved Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 327 U
104. state 1 Port Admin State Port State Force Authorized Link Down Security Network NAS Reauthentication Description Set or show Reauthentication enabledness Syntax Security Network NAS Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication disable Disable reauthentication default Show current reauthentication mode Default Setting disable Example Enable reauthentication function Last Source User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Last ID SWITCH gt security network nas reauthentication enable Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod Description Set or show the period between reauthentications Syntax Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod lt reauth_period gt 428 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt reauth_period gt Period between reauthentications 1 3600 seconds default Show current reauthentication period Default Setting 3600 Example Set reauthentication period in 3000sec SWITCH gt security network nas reauthperiod 3000 Security Network NAS EapolTimeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Security Network NAS EapolTimeout lt eapol_timeout gt Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 65535 seconds default Show current EAPOL retransmission timeout Default Setting 30 Example Set the time between EAPOL retransmissions
105. the frame is VLAN tagged TCP UDP Port Pv4 TCP UDP source destination port 193 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series DSCP IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP ToS The 3 precedence bit in the ToS byte of the IPv4 IPv6 header also known as DS field Tag Priority User Priority Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged or priority tagged e Type Value Indicates the value according to its QCE type Ethernet Type The field shows the Ethernet Type value VLAN ID The field shows the VLAN ID TCP UDP Port The field shows the TCP UDP port range DSCP The field shows the IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value e Traffic Class The QoS class associated with the QCE e Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list Deletes the QCE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL 4 9 3 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration Configure a new QoS Control Entry on this page Frames can be classified by up to 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QCL assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS Class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4
106. the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 14 5 Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP Neighbor Information for Switch 1 Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address No LLDP neighbor information found Auto Refresh C Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 306 e Local Port User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point 2 3 4 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 9 Rese
107. the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information a The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch The path cost to the root from the transmitting port E The port identifier of the transmitting port 150 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following a One switch is elected as the root switch The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch a A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch a Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MA
108. to the full AC signal level and will indicate PD disconnection 547 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 9 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual M The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch Hi Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status M Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port M Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch 2 Try another port on the Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again Ml 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting MW Switch does not power up
109. unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears LACP Port Configuration for Switch 1 i S S S SS IS SH IS Od ems A e T E SEESE SS S gt TAA oO ony om amp W NH 3 o id 3 gt ho 5 a v v lo E Ano E Ae E v 3 3 NES mn mn 2 co T y 3 2 No o N 2 2 4 18 6 SS M N i N oo 2 lt k fbfe fefo fefo ADABABRABABRAR AGA i 3 ho E a lt User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack e Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto e Role The Role s
110. used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears 314 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics for Switch 1 ala 4 2 3 4 x a an ae 6 8 a 3 re S 3 10 11 E z ES 5 12 2 2 E 12 14 5 ES lt 15 16 gt 17 gt E oe Ey 18 3 19 gt 20 E 21 Ee ie E 22 23 24 ES es Figure 4 15 4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port
111. users The VLAN Membership Status for User Static screen in Figure 4 6 4 appears VLAN Membership Status for User Static Port Members Y Y Y Yv v v v v v v Auto Refresh C Static H E vavo hfk 1 E E E d Y Y j i j d 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for User Static page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users is selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is the default VLAN membership allows the frames Classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded to the respective VLAN member ports e VLAN User AVLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication 135 Server Buttons single multicast VLAN Static iv Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular inte
112. value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears e VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches 212 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series this VLAN ID value e Tag Priority ARP Parameters Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object Description e ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag e Request Reply Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag e Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field
113. well e Point2Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false 161 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 999 999 Trunk 1 000 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Tru
114. will be lost 268 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 2 Access Management Configure access management table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of access management entry it will allow to access the switch The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears Access Management Configuration Model este Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Figure 4 12 2 Access Management Configuration Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry e HTTP HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry e SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface th
115. 0000000000000 00000000o00o0o0oo0N 000000000000 0000000000o0o00oO 0000000000000 00O00O0o0oO0o0ooooOoO o N Auto Refresh CI Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot 108 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Download Download the port statistics overview Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clears the counters for all ports ale i Cont Print out the port statistics overview 1 Auto refresh ve Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 4 3 Port Statistics Detail This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the total for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and th
116. 000sec SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Mode Disabled Port Port Mode trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted 444 trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted trusted Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP snooping mode User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports disable Disable DHCP snooping mode default Show flow DHCP snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP snooping mode SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping mode enable Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping port mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode lt port_list gt trusted untrusted 445 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message d
117. 0P Managed Switch O o0 30 4 24 04 0a SGSW 24040R PLANET SGSWW 24040R Managed Switch O Start Master Election Figure 4 17 15 The result after master election 339 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Step 6 After the Stack Master and Members have been configured any switch in the stack can be managed from the web agent by choosing the desired Member ID from the Switch drop down menu To connect to a Member switch through the CLI use the rcommand PLANET Netwertiog Commaricntion L MSGSW 24040P e 1 M SGSW 24040P 2 5 SGSW 24040R re SIN Port Man Figure 4 17 16 To manage the member switch Slave switch IP will be covered by Master one and disappear temporarily The slave IP address can be the same as Master IP address Thus if master switch is malfunctioned you can still access the other switch by the same IP address If you have difficulty in selecting another switch you may be connecting to the slave switch s web Please close the browser window use the arp d DOS command to clear the ARP table and then reopen the web 340 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 1 Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at
118. 0hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 Gbps full duplex auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex default Show configured and current mode Default Setting Auto Example Set 10Mbps half duplex speed for port1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt port mode 1 10hdx Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable flow control function for port1 SWITCH gt port flow control 1 enable 365 Port State Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode Default Setting Enable Example Disable port User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt port state 1 disable Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame gt Port maximum frame
119. 1 Power Supplied over the Spare Pins The data pairs are used Since Ethernet pairs are transformer coupled at each end it is possible to apply DC power to the center tap of the isolation transformer without upsetting the data transfer In this mode of operation the pair on pins 3 and 6 and the pair on pins 1 and 2 can be of either polarity POWER SOURCING POWERED DEVICE EQUIPMENT PSE PD Figure 8 2 Power Supplied over the Data Pins When to install PoE Consider the following scenarios e You re planning to install the latest VoIP Phone system to minimize cabling building costs when your company moves into new offices next month e The company staff has been clamoring for a wireless access point in the picnic area behind the building so they can work on their laptops through lunch but the cost of electrical power to the outside is not affordable e Management asks for IP Surveillance Cameras and business access systems throughout the facility but they would rather avoid another electrician s payment 544 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series References IEEE Std 802 3af 2003 Amendment to IEEE Std 802 3 2002 including IEEE Std 802 3ae 2002 2003 Page s 0_1 121 White Paper on Power over Ethernet IEEE802 3af http www poweroverethernet com articles php article_id 52 Microsemi PowerDsine http www microsemi com PowerDsine Linear Tech http www linear com The PoE Provision Process While
120. 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 21 Dec 2011 Keri fra Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
121. 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 185 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 4 9 2 QCL Configuration Wizard This handy wizard helps you set up a QCL quickly The QCL Configuration Wizard screen in Figure 4 9 1 appears Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard Please select an action Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets To continue click Next Next Figure 4 9 1 Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies e Set up Typical Network Setup the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control Application Rules e Setup ToS Precedence Set up the traffic class mapping to the prec
122. 2 2219 9528 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP 802 3at PoE Managed Stackable Switch Model Number SGSW 24040HP Produced by Manufacturers Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 Class A 2006 A1 2007 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 Al 2001 A2 2003 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2008 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 IEC 61000 4 5 2005 TEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 14 March 2011 Place Date Legal Signa
123. 240 Series 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 8 amp Figure 2 12 show the rear panel of these Managed Switches SGSW 24040 Rear Panel POWER ON Figure 2 8 Rear panel of SGSW 24040 Figure 2 9 Rear panel of SGSW 24040R SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 SGSW 24040HP Rear Panel Figure 2 10 Rear panel of SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 SGSW 24040HP SGSW 24240 Rear Panel Figure 2 11 Rear panel of SGSW 24240 VAN VAN So OND Figure 2 12 Rear panel of SGSW 24240R Ml AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range of 100 240VAC and 50 60 Hz Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptacle on the rear panel of the Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet and then the power will be ready 42 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The device is a power required device meaning it will not work till it is powered If your networks should be active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will Power Notice prevent you from network data loss or network downtime In some areas installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Manage
124. 24240 Series Step5 Supply power to the Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follow the instructions described below Step1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 16 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch Figure 2 16 Attach brackets to the Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 17 46 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 Figure 2 17 Mounting SGSW 24040 in a Rack Step6 Proceeds with Steps 4 and 5 of section 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch 2 2 2 Installation da
125. 2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 104 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Add new access Click to add a new access entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 105 4 4 Port Management User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items Port Configuration Port Statistics Overview Port Statistics Detail SFP Module Information Port Mirror 4 4 1 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Display SFP information Sets the source an
126. 3 456 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set RADIUS accounting server configuration SWITCH gt security acct_radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1813 Security AAA TACACS Description Set or show TACACS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA TACACS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show TACACS authentication server configuration enable Enable TACACS authentication server disable Disable TACACS authentication server default Show TACACS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server TCP port Use 0 to use the default TACACS port 49 Example Set TACACS authentication server configuration SWITCH gt security aaa tacacs 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 49 Security AAA Statistics Description Show RADIUS statistics Syntax Security AAA Statistics lt server_index gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show statistics for all servers 457 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Show RADIUS statistics SWITCH gt security aaa statistics 4
127. 40 24240 Series 6 12 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP configuration SWITCH gt lacp configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Key Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active 484 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 22 Disabled Auto Active 23 Disabled Auto Active 24 Disabled Auto Active LACP Mode Description Set or show LACP mode Syntax LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable LACP for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp mode 1 4 enable LACP Key Description Set or show the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parame
128. 4040 24240 Series Save Click to refresh the page immediately Reset Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh i i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 184 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 9 Quality of Service 4 9 1 Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to Control a wide variety of network traffic by Classifying traffic based on packet attributes Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications Applying security policy through traffic filtering Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic
129. 4040HP only Supports PoE Power up to 15 4 watts for each PoE port Supports PoE Power up to 30 8 watts for each PoE port SGSW 24040HP only Auto detects powered device PD Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports Remote power feeding up to 100m PoE Management Total PoE power budget control Pert port PoE function enable disable PoE Port Power feeding priority Per PoE port power limit PD classification detection 1 5 Product Specifications m SGSW Stackable Copper Models Hardware Specifications 24 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 4 SFP interfaces shared with Port 21 to Port 24 unen me omnia Share data Buffer 1392 kilobytes Switch Processing Scheme Store and Forward IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Flow Control Back pressure for Half Duplex lt 5 seconds System reboot Reset Button gt 10 seconds Factory Default Dimensions W x D x H 440 x 200 x 44 5 mm 1U high 28 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ce 48V DC 0 6A Power Requirement DC Range 30 60V Layer 2 Function Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Port Configuration Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status flow control status auto negotiation status and trunk status 802 1Q Tagged based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups
130. 4040P4 SGSW 24040P Produced by Manufacturer s Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 Class A 2006 A1 2007 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 Al 2001 A2 2003 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2008 A2 2010 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 TEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 2 Sept 2011 _ AA EF Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886
131. 482 Aggregation LOOKUP sristi testers taa ie 482 Aggregation Mode piiri a A ii A 483 6 12 Link Aggregation Control Protocol COMMaANd nnccncccnnnnnnnincnnicnnsern nr 484 LAG P Configurations A A TT 484 LACP Mode ds 485 LACA do e estad o a e e it eee one at a oes 485 A ects E E enacts ceuart este peee E tcpuare case han voce de tee eA ets Dhanestns hele cedecg tues settee A Pesach 486 AGP Status mov tic cotas tedio otha ta dond daras dl Moat cea e a dl De asa nl ld odd ET 486 ACP Statistics ia n 487 6 13 LLDP COMMaNd ei 488 EL DR Configura dia 488 LEDP MOde ti ro a abet atts 488 ELDP OPIO MN e e 2 es 489 LLDP IteVa ii annann a a ae eee ie vei eae 490 ELDP OIG x cio tna A ed de Bee id a ooo tind 490 A oe ies Na ett ees thes eh oteete terres ct ie at eat ki hot ak gigs ag et eben a 491 EDP REIN sb cra mo cado eat he as e Soret ts Sei ia a o Og Saath Non ria hah I e ela Nd a 491 LDP Statistics a d 492 DPI ee een Scr eva tS oe no e 493 WED PAG DPA Ware Aani asc A palace RN Fed bc a a th ne ak then ead Tat SRE Sel aa lg 493 6 14 LEDPMED Command jicz22cccecce cent caiscuc a ca a hoe a ao ete a a ae dene AE eae aa e anaana aa EEEa ae dees 494 LLDPMED ConfiguratiO secas lt dns pate deja 494 LEDPMED GiVIC 40 cctamccat co oscar de dd crash and o cda ie eta eneldo onda nd dde e ec blas dos ara S andl 494 15 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series LLDPMED ECS ci RE 495 ULDPMED Policy Delete lt 000 aia 496 ILDPMED Policy Add 10
132. 5 default Show RADIUS authentication server configuration enable Enable RADIUS authentication server disable Disable RADIUS authentication server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1812 Example Set RADIUS authentication server configuration SWITCH gt security aaa radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1812 Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS accounting server setup Syntax Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS accounting server configuration enable Enable RADIUS accounting server disable Disable RADIUS accounting server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external accounting server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 181
133. 52 Stack Master ReeleCto comida ts o ds c 353 Stack Select ete 353 stack SID Swap tscccse 00sec een ene i ade ne een ee ey ee 353 Stack SID Delete eii 354 Stack SID ASSIONi AA de a a a a a 354 6 3 IP AA ia 356 IP Configuration CTE 356 IP DHCP ic ee ee A ed a E ai 356 A o AEn E EA the es ok We eae eee Soa ale tnd og Aa es ee dee E ee te at es eo Bee 357 lo EEA a o y Peep eur aateshan See AA ceredy sae tee E at heads ert 358 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IP DING ii tii 358 IRAIN EH sea A E E E E E arcos 359 IPVO AW TOGINE IG ini e eos elle oie os e Nt e a oa dedo repr o Gan 359 ES O O NO E O ETE 360 IPV PING ii AA ee di ee 360 IP NTP Configuration ins n aa Ad nen patel 361 IBINTP Mode doepi icen erena dla beaten cens aaeeea ieai eere aan eia 362 IP NIP Server Add irienn ehoa e a vale odes tic 362 IP NTP Server IPV Add intii et ae e a aia tv a eiaa EE T LA SEEE O EE 363 IP NTP Server Delete innne ne aaa ea 363 6 4 Port Management Command s sssssssusseunrennruunnnnnnunnnunnnnunnunnnuunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunne nnmnnn ennnen nnn 364 Port ConfiguratiON re a oaie i eiei ia ieie ieia aaa E aaa i ree eats 364 Port Mode EA EE A TE E T E A TE A E EE 364 Port Flow Contra een nei id een i een leas 365 Port ateo aaa 366 Port Maximunt Frame orcas 366 Pont POWeE earen a A ed das 367 PO ad 367 Port EXC M iris 368 Port StatiStics oca Aia 368 A AE 369 6 5 MAC Address Table Command cnncinn
134. 58 6 9 Spanning Tree Protocol Command STP Configuration Description Show STP configuration Syntax STP Configuration Example Show STP configuration SWITCH gt stp cofiguration STP Configuration Tx Hold Count 6 Max Hop Count 20 STP Version Description Set or show the STP Bridge protocol version Syntax STP Version lt stp_version gt Parameters lt stp_version gt mstp rstp stp Default Setting MSTP 459 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set the STP Bridge protocol version SWITCH gt stp version rstp STP Tx Hold Description Set or show the STP Bridge Transmit Hold Count parameter Syntax STP Txhold lt holdcount gt Parameters lt holdcount gt STP Transmit Hold Count 1 10 Default Setting 6 Example Set STP Tx hold in 10 SWITCH gt stp txhold 10 STP MaxHops Description Set or show the MSTP Bridge Max Hop Count parameter Syntax STP MaxHops lt maxhops gt Parameters lt maxhops gt STP BPDU MaxHops 6 40 Default Setting 20 460 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set STP maximum hops in 25 SWITCH gt stp maxhops 25 STP MaxAge Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge maximum age Syntax STP MaxAge lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt STP maximum age time 6 40 and max_age lt forw
135. 65 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Port Limit Control Configuration System Configuration Stack Global halon Disabled Reopen Disabled Reopen Olio Y EN ES Z 3 Disabled Reopen Disabled Esoren Disabled i Reopen OO EE j EJ ES Disabled Reopen c lA el ES a lel Pe ll el lel A fel Elle gt 5 gt 3 i 5 ra fa A Disabled Esomen Di Disabled Reopen O Goa a os O et y i Disabled Reopen o Disabled Reopen E 3 o g E E E E j ES i Disabled Reopen Disabled Reopen i Disabled Feren Y Disabled Reopen T z ES ES Disabled Reopen _ mn None Disabled Reopen None Disabled Reopen co a EEEE MEMEA a 3 3 3 Tone Disabled Reoren None Disabled Reopen None Disabled Reopen Disabled Peopen No S EE E ES p S i af 8 F 3 lt Disabled Reopen hh to X HE EEI KIR Disabled Reopen Disabled Reopen 7 j Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview page screenshot 266 The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Description e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit ch
136. 9F LAB System Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 Example To set timezone Switch gt system timezone 0 System Prompt Description Set the CLI prompt string Syntax System Prompt lt prompt gt 348 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt prompt gt CLI prompt string Default Setting SWITCH Example To change CLI title Switch gt system prompt SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040 gt System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot Example To reboot device without changing any of the settings Switch gt system reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System Restore Default keep_ip Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default Restore full configuration Example To restore default value but do not reset IP address Switch gt system restore default keep_ip 349 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series System Load Description Show current CPU load 100ms 1s and 10s running average in percent zero is idle Syntax System Load Example To show current CPU load Switch gt system load Load average 100ms 1s 10s 1 1 System Log Description Show or
137. AN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 e Max Reauth Count The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode T
138. AN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same 235 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLAN
139. C address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets a Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocki
140. CP Statistics for Switch 1 Port LACP R ived LACP T itted 0 eceive ransmitte Unknown egal 0 0000420 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 El O El O EN O E O E O EN O E O El O E O EN O E O E OO El O E O E O E O E O E O E O E O E O E O E O A OO Oo00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 000 Auto Refresh O Figure 4 5 7 LACP Port statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Car Clears the counters for all ports 124 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds t
141. DC power input Connect the power cable to the switch at the input terminal block 1 The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3 5 2 The terminals are marked 48V FG 3 Loosen the two screws so you can slide the DC cable beneath it Insert the DC cable into the connector first and screw it tightly 4 Connect the power cable to the DC power supply After the power up or reset the Managed Switch performs a cold start procedure 50 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 100 240V AC Figure 2 20 48V DC connector Wara Before connecting the DC power cable to the input terminal block of Managed Switch ensure that the arning j power switch is in the OFF position and the DC power is OFF 51 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 2 3 Stack Installation SGSW 24040 24240 Series The SGSW 24040 24240 Managed Switch series provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP address And up to 384 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as needed You can add the SGSW 24040 24240 switch series as needed to support more network clients knowing that your switching fabric will scale to meet increasing traffic demands Two types of stack topologies are supported by the SGSW 24040 24240 series a Chain topology same as a disconnected ring Ring topology Please find the follow
142. Default Setting 100 Example Set value 1000 for UPnP Advertising Duration SWITCH gt upnp advertising duration 1000 520 6 21 MVR Command MVR Configuration Description Show the MVR configuration Syntax MVR Configuration Example Show the MVR configuration SWITCH gt mvr configuration MVR Configuration MVR Mode Disabled Muticast VLAN ID 100 Port Port Mode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Port Type Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Immediate Leave Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 521 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Receive Receive Receive Disabled Disabled Disabled Receive Receive Receive MVR Group Description Show the MVR group Syntax MVR Group MVR Status Description Show the MVR status Syntax MVR Status MVR Mode Description Set or show the MVR mode Syntax MVR Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable MVR m
143. Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description 251 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Access Accepts Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped 252 radiusAuthClientExtA ccessAccepts radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRejects radiusAuthClientExtA ccessChallenges radiusAuthClientExt MalformedAccessRe sponses radiusAuthClientExtB adAuthenticators radiusAuthClientExtU nknownTypes radiusAuthClientExtP acketsDropped The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the serve
144. Error Server Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID Auto Refresh Refresh Clear Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Server Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Server The packets number that relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The packets number those errors sending packets to clients e Receive form Server The packets number that received packets from server e Receive Missing Agent The packets number that received packets without agent information options Option e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which the Circuit ID option was Circuit ID missing 80 Receive Missing Remote ID User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The packets number that received packets which Remote ID option was missing Receive Bad Circuit ID The packets number that the Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID Receive Bad Remote ID Client Statistics Object The packets number that the Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Description Transmit to Client The packets number that relayed packets from server to client Transmit Error The packets number that error sending packets to servers Receive form Client The packets number that received packets from server Receive Agent Option The packets number that received packets with rel
145. Guard Limit Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port limitation for dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard limit lt port_list gt lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited dynamic entry limit 0 2 or unlimited Default Setting unlimited 449 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set IP source guard limit SWITCH gt security network ip source guard 1 1 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry Description Add or delete IP source guard static entry Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt ip_mask gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port IP source guard static entry delete Delete existing port IP source guard static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_ip gt IP address a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request lt ip_mask gt IP mask a b c d IP mask for allowed IP address Example Add IP source guard static entry SWITCH gt security network ip source guard entry 1 add 1 192 168 0 20 255 255 255 0 Security Network IP Source Guard Status Description Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Status lt port_list gt Parameters
146. H gt security switch snmp user delete 1 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey Description Change SNMPv3 user password Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Changekey lt engineid gt lt user_name gt lt auth_password gt lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all fFH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp user changekey 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 87654321 12345678 Security Switch SNMP User Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 user entry 413 Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 user entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp user lookup Auth Priv Number of entries 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 group entry User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Auth Priv MD5 DES The entry index key are lt security_model gt and lt security_name gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Add lt security_model gt lt security_name gt lt group_name gt Parameters lt security_model gt v1 Reserved for
147. Help PLANET MAC Address Device Name Version NetMask Description i 00 30 4F 76 27 10 SGSW 24040P 1 5b100623 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 PLANET SGSW 24040F Select Adapter 10 1 1 73 00 80 C6 FB 08 05 I Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All Connect to Device Device GSW 2404SF 00 30 4F 63 54 5C Get Device Information done Figure 2 25 Use PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to display the IP address of stack master 54 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 1 The stack switch with the least priority ID or MAC Address number will become Master Only Master switch s management interface console telnet web and SNMP is accessible It allows to build a stack of up to 16 PLANET SGSW Switches If there is the space limitation or power issue and you wish to stack all the switches in different racks use long stack cables CB STX200 to connect two stacks 1 l i Da 7 CB STX50 Figure 2 26 Separated Stack connection 55 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contai
148. ID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between feature Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules e VLAN User AVLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only ona single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to 137 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Buttons Static Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page
149. IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 300 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Object Description e Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save e Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports e Application Type Intended
150. IPv6 autoconfig function SWITCH gt ip ipv6 autoconfig enable 359 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IPv6 Setup Description Set or show the IPv6 setup Syntax IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6_addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ipv6_prefix gt IPv6 subnet mask default Show IPv6 prefix lt ipv6_router gt IPv6 router default Show IPv6 router IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Addres
151. K ACT ff If L10 100 NK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps If LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps 10 100 Orange Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port LNK ACT If 1000 LNK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps If 1000 LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Ml 100 1000Base X SFP interfaces Color Function Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with 1000 speed 1000Mbps Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 100Mbps LNK ACT ff If 1000 LNK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps If 1000 LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Hi 7 Segment LED Display Stack ID 1 9 A F 0 To indicate the Switch ID of each SGSW Managed Switch Switch IDs are used to uniquely identify the Managed Switches within a stack The Switch ID of each Managed Switch is shown on the display on the front of the Managed Switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands of the Stack group sexo fet stale lel 7 elofaflejeojojeje o eee AA eee ee eae 41 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24
152. LAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark 132 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Accept Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All e Link Type Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to selected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged e Q in Q Mode Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer
153. LLDP MED neighbor device information Syntax LLDPMED Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDPMED Debuge_med_transmit_var Description Set or show if the current value of the global medTansmitEnable variable Section Section 11 2 1 TIA 1057 Syntax LLDPMED debug_med_transmit_var lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Set medTansmitEnable variable to true disable Disable Set medTansmitEnable variable to false default Show medTansmitEnable variable value 499 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 15 Power over Ethernet Command PoE Configuration Description Show PoE configuration Syntax PoE Configuration Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show PoE configuration SWITCH gt poe configuration Priority Max Power W PowerAlloc W Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 500 22 Enabled High 23 Enabled High 24 Enabled High Power management mode Power management mode automode PoE Mode Description Set or show the PoE mode Syntax PoE Mode lt port_list gt enable disable aflat Parameters lt port_list gt Port list
154. Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode Auto Speed Setup Auto negotiation 10 Half Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode 10 Full Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100 Half Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode a 100 Full Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode E 1000 Full Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode E Disable Shutdown the port manually e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes e Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default a Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions e Power Control The Usage colum
155. Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Number of entries 1 SNMPv3 Groups Table Idx Model Security Name Group Name public default_ro_group private default_rw_group v2c public default_ro_group v2c private default_rw_group usm default_user default_rw_group Number of entries 5 SNMPv3 Views Table Idx View Name View Type OID Subtree default_view included Number of entries 1 SNMPv3 Accesses Table Model Level default_ro_group any NodAuth NoPriv default_rw_group any NodAuth NoPriv Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP Mode Description Set or show the SNMP mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP disable Disable SNMP default Show SNMP mode 401 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP mode SWITCH gt security switch snmp mode disable Security Switch SNMP Version Description Set or show the SNMP protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP version Default Setting 2c Example Set SNMP in version 3 SWITCH gt security switch snmp version 3 Security Switch SNMP Read Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP read access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Read Community lt community gt 402 User s Manual of SGS
156. Master Reelect Example Force master reelection User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Stack Select Description Set or show the selected switch ID Syntax Stack Select lt sid gt all Parameters lt sid gt all Switch ID 1 16 or all switch Default Setting Switch ID All Example Select the switch ID Switch gt stack select 1 SWITCH Switch_1 gt Stack SID Swap Description Swap SID values used to identify two switches User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Stack SID Swap lt sid gt lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 default Show SID Example Change stack SID value Stack SID Delete Description Delete SID assignment and associated configuration Syntax Stack SID Delete lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Example Delete stack SID 10 Stack SID Assign Description Assign SID and associated configuration to switch SID must be unassigned switch must be present and switch must not already be assigned to a SID Syntax Stack SID Assign lt sid gt lt mac_addr gt 354 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx xx XX XX XX Example Assign SID 10 for 00 30 4f 24 04 0a Switch gt stack sid assign 10 00 30 4f 24 04 0a Switch gt 355 6 3 IP Command IP Configuration Descrip
157. Ol PoE ON PoE Ol PoE ON PoE Ol PoE Search PoE Search PoE ON PoE O PoE ON PoE O PoE ON PoE O PoE Search PoE Search PoE Search PoE Search PoE Search PoE Search E PoE Neighbors Stack 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 o D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 271 6 W 5219 mA Auto Refresh L Refresh Figure 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Status 316 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device Voice over IP phones Enterprise can install POE VoIP Phone ATA and other Ethernet non Ethernet end devices to the central where UPS is installed for un interrupt power system and power control system 3 5 watts Wireless LAN Access Points Museum Sightseeing Airport Hotel Campus Factory Warehouse can install the Access Point any where with no hesitation 6 12 watts IP Surveillance C Enterprise Museum Campus Hospital Bank can install IP Camera without limits of install location no need electrician to install AC sockets 10 12 watts PoE Splitter PoE Splitter split the PoE 48V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5 9 12V DC power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power i outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces 3 12 watts the installation time 4 16 2 Power Configuration In a power over Ethernet system operating power is applied from a power source PSU power supply
158. P Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields
159. P Packet IGMP v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Querier mode support IP based ACL MAC based ACL Access Control List Up to 256 entries RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 32 m SGSW Stackable PoE models Produet sos SOSW 24040P4 Sasw 24040HP Hardware Specification Copper Ports 24 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports SFP mini GBIC Slots 4 SFP interfaces shared with Port 21 to Port 24 EAT telnet IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Flow Control Back pressure for Half Duplex lt 5 seconds System reboot Reset Button gt 10 seconds Factory Default Dimensions W x D x H 440 x 300 x 44 5 mm 1U high Weight Power Link Act and speed p
160. P bridge priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default MSTI CIST MST1 MST2 MST3 MST4 MST5 MST6 MST7 Example Bridge Priority 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Set MST1 priority value in 48 SWITCH gt sip msti priority 1 48 STP MSTI Map Description Show or clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration Syntax STP Msti Map lt msti gt clear Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 Clear Clear VID to MSTI mapping 465 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Add MST1 priority value in 48 SWITCH gt stp msti priority 1 48 STP MSTI Add Description Add a VLAN to a MSTI Syntax STP Msti Add lt msti gt lt vid gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Add MST71 in vlan1 SWITCH gt stp msti add 1 1 STP Port Configuration Description Show STP Port configuration Syntax STP Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Example Show STP status of Port1 SWITCH gt stp port configuration 1 Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restricn bpduGuard Point2point Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto 466 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series STP Port Mode Description Set or show the STP enabling for a port
161. Port Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Forced join to Voice VLAN e Port Security Buttons Save Click to save changes Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 205 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 9 10 Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 30 4f PLANET phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 0f e2 H3C phones 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones 00 e0 75 Polycom phones 00 e0 bb 3Com phones 00 01 e3 Siemens AG phones Figure 4 9 15 Voice VLAN OUI Table page screenshot O O O O O O O O The page
162. Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ 45 Ports F SFP Ports ai Stack Ports w aia ana Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can set up the Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears 65 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series LM SGSW 24010P v Link Aggreg VLAN Spanning Tree Security LLDP Diagnostics PoE Stack Figure 4 1 5 SGSW Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 66 4 2 System User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Use the system menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration IPv6 Configuration Users Configuration Users Privilege Levels NTP Configuration UPnP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Statistics CPU Load System Log Detailed Log Remote Syslog SMTP Configure Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup Configuration Upload Factory Default System Reboot The switch system information is provided here Configure the switch managed IP information on this
163. QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show QoS Configuration of port 1 4 SWITCH gt qos configuration 1 4 QoS Configuration Storm Multicast Disabled 1 pps Storm Broadcast Disabled 1 pps Storm Unicast Disabled 1 pps Port Default Tag Priority QCLID Rate Limiter Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 Disabled Disabled Strict 1 2 4 8 QoS Classes Description Set or show the number of traffic classes 505 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax QoS Classes lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Number of traffic classes 1 2 or 4 Default Setting 4 Example Set QoS classes 2 SWITCH gt qos classes 2 QoS Default Description Set or show the default port priority Syntax QoS Default lt port_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 Default Setting Low Example Set high priority for port5 SWITCH gt qos default 5 high QoS Tag Priority Description Set or show the port VLAN tag priority 506 Syntax QoS Tagprio lt port_list gt lt tag_prio gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 Default S
164. S 232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users an run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device Reset button At the left of front panel the reset button is designed for reboot the Managed Switch without turn off and on the power The following is the summary table of Reset button functions Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System reboot Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as below gt 5 sec Factory Default Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Stack ID Each SGSW Managed Stackable Switch on a stack must have a unique Stack ID There are 16 degrees 0 9 A F in the rotary switch The Stack ID is configured via Web or CLI management interface Use the Stack ID to identify the location of the real device Bry a Stack ID is not equal to the Master Priority that configured in the management interface Note Master LED If master switch fails or is disconnected to the switch by stack port the switch with the least switch ID will become master 37 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 2 1 2 LED Indications The front p
165. SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress filtering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable Example Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port20 SWITCH gt vlan ingressfilter 20 enable VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1q Parameters portbased Port Based VLAN Mode dot1q 802 1Q VLAN Mode default Show VLAN Mode Default Setting IEEE 802 1Q Example Set VLAN mode in port base SWITCH gt vlan mode portbased VLAN Link Type Description Set or show the port VLAN link type 378 Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports untagged VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged default Show VLAN link type Default Setting Un tagged Example Enable tagged frame for port2 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt vlan linktype 2 tagged VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN Qinqmode lt port_list gt disable man customer Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode default Show VLAN QinQ Mode Ex
166. SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_name gt A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to lt group_name gt Example Add SNMPv3 group entry A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to SWITCH gt security switch snmp group add usm admin_snmpv3 group_snmpv3 414 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Switch SNMP Group Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 group entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp group delete 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 group entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp group lookup Idx Model Security Name Group Name private default_rw_group public default_ro_group private default_rw_group default_user default_rw_group Number of entries 4 415 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Switch SNMP View Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 view entry The entry index key are lt view_name gt and lt oid_subtree gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Add lt view_name gt included excluded lt oid_subtree gt P
167. Search PoE Search D i PoE Search 271 6 W 5219 mA Auto Refresh Figure 4 16 4 PoE Status screenshot 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 D 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Current Power Show the total watts usage of PoE Switch Consumption e Total Power Reserved Shows how much the total power be reserved for all PDs 323 e PoE Temperature Unit 1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Display the current operating temperature of PoE chip unit 1 The unit 1 is in charge of PoE Port 1 Port 12 e PoE Temperature Unit 2 Display the current operating temperature of PoE chip unit 2 The unit 1 is in charge of PoE Port 13 Port 24 e Local Port This is the logical port number for this row e PD Class Display the class of the PD attached to the port as established by the classification process Class 0 is the default for PDs The PD is classified based on power The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes APD shall return Class 0 to 3 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 16 1 e Power Used W The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using e Current Used mA The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using e Priority The Priority shows the port s prior
168. Security Network Limit Limit sisisi s 424 Security Network Limit Action tai 425 Security Network Limit REOPOM iesirocrrir ateo eee reia 425 Security Network NAS ConfiguratiON oooocccinnnncnnoccccnnnoncncnnnannnnnonnnnnn non nnnnnnn nn ran n nn nn 426 12 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Network NAS Mode sssini cfuveteeevedgnenssbeedeeseedd 426 Security Network NAS State iirinn ie aeea AAEE E aANT aaa eE AEAEE ATAN aA EASE EAEE EEA nan 427 Security Network NAS Reauthentication ccccccecceceeeeeceec cece cece eeceaeae cesses eeceaeaeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeeesesenaeeeeeeeeeseesaees 428 Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod oooooccccnnoccconoccccnononnncnononcnonono conan nn nn nnnn nn AAAA rre rr rra rre rre 428 Security Network NAS EapolTiMeOUt oooocccnnnnnccnnococcnononcncnnnoncnn nono tnnt non n nn nana rra r non n rre rre 429 Security Network NAS Agetime cicomoioicinaii A ida 429 Security Network NAS Holdtime oooooconoccccnonoccnononcccnononcnnnono nono nono enito p nn rre 430 Security Network NAS RADIUS_QOS cooocccccococccocococccononcncnononcnononncnnnnn nn nrnnnn nn nr nn n rre 430 Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN ooocccncocccococccccononcnonononcno nono ncnnnnnnnr nan nnn rn n rre 431 Security Network NAS Guest VLAN oococccccococccononnncnnnoncnnnnnonnnn non nn nano n rr rra rre rre 432 Security Network NAS Authenticate ioocoocinnoncniccii e lie 432 Security Network NAS Statistics ooooooonnncccnnonccn
169. Series Security Network ARP Inspection ENtlY oocoonnccnnonocinnnoccncnonancno nono ncnononnnn intett Anut n nn nan r rra 452 Security Network ARP Inspection Status oooooooinnncnnnnoccccnonocnnononcccnononnnnnnno cnn rro nuna EAEE NE ran rn rn 453 Security AAA Configuration a 453 SECUFITY AAA Ti da 454 Security AAA Dead da Cote 455 Security AAA RADIUS rees a lees sad doo o e le eee 455 Security AAA ACCT RADIOS ipisna prene ana 456 SecurityAAATAGAGS ter ad e o o do e ed a e o o 457 Security AAA STAtiSt CS oi e aa ddan deuseue ates see cees e ceeusbeeedie a andiae 457 6 9 Spanning Tree Protocol Command occocicocccnnccononnnnocnnonnnncn nn 459 STP Configuration lis poc 459 STP A O 459 SIP A ee A DAL net E Me de 460 STP MaxHops wich nae nee eee i se ae ee ie ee ee 460 SIPMAxA JO ot o no e hee Acton Woosh vend sleds Sidon eee ehd te et deh Bele ena 461 STP EWOD CLAY ie custodiada etre toenail ae a at tech eee Sakae ideal 461 SMP GS NQMC s 2 5802 es Ta Sara lo at me hd A ta tht Saat when oboe aS chit oh aS ed it ta hdd add oe ta a te 462 STP BPDU Filter ta ata 462 SAA iDO EN Eio B EE A E to a a e e o 463 STP RECOVERY ien ia A aea Aaea 463 AMIA E AN E E OT OT A TEE OE TE 464 STP MST Prior a E ie die a E E a ee 465 STP MST Map e e e e CA ee ae ee o r 465 SARAAN Ao o MEE E EE E tadas 466 STP Port Configuration A A A A 466 STP Port Mode ui da 467 SEP ROME ge x rire E e o e e ta oe 467 STP Port AUTO ERGG iii baii 468 RA A rA Aic
170. Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable unicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm unicast enable 1k QoS Strom Multicast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter 511 Syntax QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable multicast storm control disable Disable multicast storm control User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable multicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm multicast enable 1k QoS Strom Broadcast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Broadcast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable broadcast storm control disable Disable broadcast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable broadcast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm broadcast enable 1k QoS DSCP Remarking Description Set or show the status of QoS DSCP Remarking Syntax QoS DSCP Remarking lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable QoS Remarking disable Disable QoS Remarking Default Setting Disabled Example Enable the status of
171. Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping multicast stream control 172 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below pe Meaning Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is 0x11 Present Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see w
172. Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 16 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 117 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 5 1 Static Aggregation Configuration This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors The Aggeration Mode COnfiguration screen in Figure 4 5 2 appears Aggregation Mode Configuration Stack Global Settings Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number j Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By defa
173. Switch oO 00 30 4 76 27 10 2 Yes 34 SGSW 24010P PLANET SGSWW 24040P Managed Switch O Start Master Election Figure 4 17 12 Stack Configuration Step 5 We wish to make the SGSW switch with MAC 00 30 4f 76 27 10 Switch ID 2 become the Stack Master and swap the Switch ID to 1 338 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series a Select the switch with ID 1 and assign a new ID for this unit for example ID 4 Stack Configuration Master Delete Stack Member Master Description Switch Type ld Capable Trani Poon utente Yes 3 D0 30 4f 24 04 Da SGSW 24040R PLANET SGSWV 24040R Managed Switch O 00 30 4 76 27 10 l SGSW 24040P PLANET SGSWW 24040P Managed Switch 3 4 O Start Master Election 5 s 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Figure 4 17 13 Assing new ID for current master a Select the target switch and set up with lower priority 1 also re assing the Switch ID 1 for it After click Save click Start Master Election and save again Stack Bic 00 30 4f 24 04 0a SGSW 24040R PLANET SGSWW 24040R Managed Switch O o0 30 4 76 27 10 SGSW 24040P PLANET SGSWW 24040P Managed Switch Figure 4 17 14 Assing lower priority value fo the target switch a Reflash the web browser and the switch with MAC address 00 30 4f 76 27 10 will become the stack master now Stack es ee 00 30 4 76 27 10 SGSW 24040P PLANET SGSWW 2404
174. Table Di DA 290 4 13 6 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table oooonoocccnnocicnnoccccnononcncnononnnn E e i ieni iaaa 291 AA dali 293 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol irsini i ia Ea aai 293 414 2 CLDP Configuration igi e ea a debia 293 4 14 3 LLDPMED Configuration 3 c s ucereeeccsecntecnesduassatedecneneecnereasddsseresecnacnessceedensunseceapsiaednuernesdnansatedecseneednertasticees 297 4 144 LLDP MED eighb r sere eiae cias 303 AAAS Neighbor e es e Sa 306 4 14 60 POr StatiSties tiradas a aripi Eana aeti 308 4 15 Network DiaQnoOstics viii dei nd da darte 310 AAD T mal DS is cromos ado Bn cid o e to bo o lo a cto de e dl ce dad add he a NAL 311 4 15 2 PVO 5 y ee ee eee 312 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test oca 313 4 15 4 Cable DidgNOsStiCS iia ii 314 4 16 Power over Ethernet SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 SGSW 24040HP cococoncccconoccccononosncnnnnannnnos 316 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device oocooococccoccccnonoccccnononcnononcncnnnononnnnno nn n rn n nn naar rre rre 317 4 16 2 Power Configurations seia A A A da 317 4 10 3 Port Configuration A o DOE 320 4164 POE Mall eat 323 4 16 5 POE Schedule oso att o ese nico ne de ee eta e e laa e o real as e cl 325 4 16 6 LLDP Neighbor Power Over EtherMet oocooocccinoccccconoccnonononcnononononano conc nono nnnrnnnn nn nn nn nn rr rare 326 BAT Stack A ea SA E Sedan Makes ee T i danas Meanie ak aes 328 AAT A Stack ey eefe eee e ie i Lo ce vie ee i ee 330 AACA SWiteh DSi o sae teo o
175. The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use 192 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series QoS Control List Configuration QCE Type Type Value Traffic Class a Tag Priority 4 9 3 QoS Control List Configuration This page lists the QCEs for a given QCL a Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High a The classification is controlled by a QoS assigned to each port a A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class a This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QoS Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 7 appears QoS Control List Configuration OCL 1 v QCE Type Type Value Traffic Class Figure 4 9 7 QoS Control List Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCL Select a QCL to display a table that lists all the QCEs for that particular QCL e QCE Type Specifies which frame field the QCE processes to determine the QoS class of the frame The following QCE types are supported Ethernet Type The Ethernet Type field If frame is tagged this is the Ethernet Type that follows the tag header VLAN ID VLAN ID Only applicable if
176. V s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable 489 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable Example Disable description of the port for port1 SWITCH gt IIdp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 Example Set transmission interval in 10 SWITCH gt lldp interval 10 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 490 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set LLDP hold value in 10 SWITCH gt lldp hold 10 LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP delay value in 1 SWITCH gt lldp delay 1 LLDP Reinit Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 491 User s M
177. VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network Set Out layer VLAN tag The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on ether type a tunnel access port 802 1Q Tag 8100 VMAN Tag 88A8 Default 802 1Q Tag The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 133 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 6 5 VLAN Membership Configuration E Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 255 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 3 appears VLAN Membership Configuration for Switch 1 Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page as Pon Member rea Derete vian io 2 aJa 5 Te 71e 0 0 5009 22J224 1 MMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMA Add new entry Se ea Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all stack switch unit
178. VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 126 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was orig
179. W 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP read community Default Setting public Example Set SNMP read community private SWITCH gt security switch snmp read community private Security Switch SNMP Write Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP write access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Write Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP write community Default Setting private Example Set public value in SNMP write community SWITCH gt security switch snmp write community public Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode enable disable 403 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters enable Enable SNMP traps disable Disable SNMP traps default Show SNMP trap mode Default Setting disable Example Enable SNMP trap mode SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap mode enable Security Switch SNMP Trap Version Description Set or show the SNMP trap protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP trap version Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap version in ve
180. a OA esac OA OA EEE EAEE Eaa aiai ae 36 2 1 H rdware Descriptio M n eeaeee taaan 36 21 1 Switch Front Pane keneen aaea additional iena e aaea aaie 36 2 Ve2 LED Md AOS a o dt di eae toes 38 2 1 3 Switch Rear Padel ccoo A AAA 42 2 2 Installing the SWitCh 0 A anios 45 22 1 Desktop Installation il 45 22 2 Rack MOOO e nes A o A Ti E He a a 46 2 2 2 Installation CANS UN Lack AAA ee eeee cece cece ee ceee N E E E E 47 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver viii adas 48 2 2 4 Connecting DC Power Supply miooo pai e esd asa dae ii aaa See onl eet enn en a 50 2 3 Stack Installation soins aeae aa A di 52 2 3 1Connecting Stacking Cable a ie e a a a a aTa aa S aE 53 2 3 2 Management StackiNg uvas its 53 3 SWITCH MANAGE MENG citar 56 E A isic ea a Ea a aaa aa aE aE Ea aa 56 3 2 Management Access OvVerVie Wenn 57 3 3 Administration COnSole wiz jiic sc ic A A iia 57 3 4 Web Management tee ctectecenetvcctessenedecuecucteesvase eana ao Senne aaan iraa iena Caua saate sdecveqaettedvatsecdvesees 59 3 5 SNMP based Network Management sccccssccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeenseeeeeaesesaaeeaseaeeeeeeesgaeseseeeenseeeseaeedsnaesenseeeees 61 4 WEB CONFIGURATION iaa teta tarta iaa Rita 62 ATMAN WOD Page roinn a ETRE A E EAEE EEA EE E E E 65 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series AS O e 67 E ES A A A E 68 4 2 2 1P COMIQUT AIN cia ae ai cita 69 ARI O O ett 70 4 24USBTS C nfiguration ta A aa aaa cat 71 4 2 5 Users Privilege Levels oia
181. a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 6 3 VLAN Basic Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears VLAN Basic Information Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Current Number of VLANs 1 VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes VLAN Basic Information Mode IEEE 802 1Q Maximum VLAN ID 4095 The page includes the following fields Object Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information page screenshot Description e Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch E Port Based a IEEE 802 1Q VLAN e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch e Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch e Current number of VLANs Display the current number of VLANs e VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode The Managed Switch supports IVL IVL Independent vlan learning e Configurable PVID Tagging Indicates whether or not configurable PVID tagging is implemented 129 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration Thi
182. a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gamin
183. acking interface M 24 100 1000Base X mini GBIC SFP slots EH 8 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 shared with Port 1 to Port 8 N RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup E 2 High performance 5GbE Stacking interface gt Layer 2 Features Ml Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x pause frame flow control Full Duplex Ml High performance of Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth MM Storm Control support Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast M Support VLAN IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Voice VLAN Hi Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol spanning tree by VLAN BPDU Guard HM Support Link Aggregation 25 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 12 trunk groups up to 16 ports per trunk group Up to 16Gbps bandwidth Duplex Mode MM Provide Port Mirror many to 1 MM Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port gt Quality of Service Ml Ingress
184. ad access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will associated with SNMPv3 communities table e Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string 95 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series will associated with SNMPv3 communities table e Engine ID Buttons Save Click to save changes Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 3 SNMP System Information Configuration The switch system information is provided here The System Information Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears System Information Configuration System Cona SGSW 24040P Figure 4 3 2 System Information Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object De
185. adding PoE support to networked devices is relatively painless it should be realized that power cannot simply be transferred over existing CAT 5 cables Without proper preparation doing so may result in damage to devices that are not designed to support provision of power over their network interfaces The PSE is the manager of the PoE process In the beginning only small voltage level is induced on the port s output till a valid PD is detected during the Detection period The PSE may choose to perform classification to estimate the amount of power to be consumed by this PD After a time controlled start up the PSE begins supplying the 48 VDC level to the PD till it is physically or electrically disconnected Upon disconnection voltage and power shut down Since the PSE is responsible for the PoE process timing it is the one generating the probing signals prior to operating the PD and monitoring the various scenarios that may occur during operation All probing is done using voltage induction and current measurement in return Stages of powering up a PoE link Volts specified Volts managed per 802 3af by chipset Measure whether powered device has the correct signature Detection 2 7 10 0 1 8 10 0 resistance of 15 33 kQ Classification Measure which power level class the resistor indicates 14 5 20 5 12 5 25 0 Normal operation Supply power to device 36 57 25 0 60 0 Line Detection Before power is applied safety dictates that it must fir
186. addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 558 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the
187. age at regular intervals 4 5 4 LACP Port Status This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears LACP Status for Switch 1 LACP Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port No Auto Refresh O 122 The page includes the following fields User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Figure 4 5 6 LACP Port Status page screenshot Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled e Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs Partner System ID The partners System ID MAC address Partner Port The partners port number connected to this port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 123 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP statistics screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears LA
188. ains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress port with VLAN VID Tag Untag table MI IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 130 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Q in Q VLAN Tunnel A VLAN 1 20 WGSW 24040 Edge Switch b E N Q in Q Customer B s LAN Headquater MAN Edge Switch MAN Service Provider Domain y Eu 4 Q in Q A Y MAN Edge Switch
189. al of SGSW 24040 24240 Series the entry e Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration gt Security gt AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all po
190. al table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out e TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value e Org Discarded The number of organizationally TLVs received e Age Outs Buttons Refresh Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Click to refresh the page immediately Clear F clear J Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot 309 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 15 Network Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to po
191. allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears ICMP Ping Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets 311 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 15 2 IPv6 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 15 2 appears ICMP v6 Ping 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 15 2 ICMPv6 Ping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IPv6 Address
192. am Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value ALLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet 566 UDP UPnP User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the applicat
193. ample Set port2 in man port SWITCH gt vlan qing 2 man 379 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set out layer VLAN tag ether type MAN dotiq Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q default Show VLAN out layer VLAN tag ether type Default Setting N A Example Set out layer VLAN tag Ethernet type for port 10 in man Ethernet type SWITCH gt vlan ethtype 10 man VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 1 Example Add port17 to port24 in VLAN10 SWITCH gt vlan add 10 17 24 380 VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt Parameters User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Delete port17 to port24 in VLAN10 SWITCH gt vlan delete 10 VLAN Lookup Description Lookup VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Lookup lt vid gt combined static nas mvr voice_vian all Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs combined Shows All the Combined VLAN database static
194. anagement Address E Enable 0030012 WN eallealical eallieallcallcallealical ieallicalicallical iallicalleallicalicalicalicallicalic E YE RKREE REKER RARER SKS SKS KSC A i lefa fee dE EE Y E SSSI KARAKARA SSIS SS dE E E Y Y E E E Y E E 8 E 9 SS SKK SS dE RE E E ERES KARANAA KARAKE RICICICICIQ QC CIC CEREC CECECECECA CEREC RREK Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval 294 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series gt 4 Delay Interval e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the d
195. anagement workstation Savein 9 Config Backup My Recent Documents My Network Save as type All Files j Figure 4 2 23 File save screen 90 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 18 Configuration Upload This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Upload screen in Figure 4 2 24 appears Configuration Upload Browse ited Figure 4 2 24 Configuration Upload page screenshot Configuration Upload 1 Click the tome configuration button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved Choose file Look in B Config Backup e PE y My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network File name confg xml z Places Files of type fan Files v Cancel Figure 4 2 25 Windows file selection menu popup Upload 2 Select on the configuration file then click VP and the bottom of the browser shows the upload status 3 After down the main screen appears Transfer Completed 91 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 19 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Fi
196. and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 6 9 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switches poset eee en ee ee pa E aT a x l l i l l i i I I 1 i 1 i I i 1 i i i i 1 I 1 i l l 1 l i i i l 1 1 i l l l i l i i l i i i l i i i l l i i PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 I i PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 i 1 Untagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Untagged Tagged l I 1 VLAN 2 l VLAN 3 1 N a 2 Figure 4 6 8 two separate VLAN diagram VLAN Group 1 1 Port 7 Port 24 N A VLAN Group 2 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 VLAN Group 3 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Table 4 1 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follow E Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 142 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 a Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 5 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 wi
197. anel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity and system power helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 5 amp Figure 2 7 show the LED indications of these Managed Switches SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R LED indication gt PLANET SGSW 24040 Networking amp Communication SIX2 0 STX1 0 A 0 o S 115200 N 8 1 3 set PWR ya A 0 1000 10 100 Function Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure Lights to indicate that the Switch is the Master of the stack group STX1 Green Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established STX2 Green Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established 10 100 1000Base T interfaces Color Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps 1000 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port ENIRIAGT Off If L10 100 NK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps If LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Off If 1000 LNK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps 10 100 Orange Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or re
198. ansmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk that a LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility for that the neighbors has received the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission is repeated The recommended value is 4 times giving that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when a LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including between Network Connectivity Devices or to other types of links Object Description e Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator
199. anual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3 SWITCH gt IIdp reinit 3 LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LLDP statistics Example Show LLDP Statistics of port 1 SWITCH gt lldp statistics 1 LLDP global counters Neighbor entries was last changed at 323592 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added 0 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP local counters Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx TLV RxTLV RxTLV Port Frames Frames Errors Discards Errors Unknown Organz Aged 492 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series LLDP Info Description Show LLDP neighbor device information Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDP CDP Aware Description Set or show if discovery information from received CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol frames is added to the LLDP neighbor table Syntax LLDP cdp_aware lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable CDP awareness CDP discovery information is added to the LLDP neighbor table disable Disable CDP awareness default Show CDP awareness configuration Default
200. ar Security Network ACL Status Description Show ACL status Syntax Security Network ACL Status combined static dhcp upnp arp_inspection ip_source_guard conflicts Parameters combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status dhcp Shows the status by DHCP upnp Shows the status by UPnP arp_inspection Shows the status by ARP Inspection ip_source_guard Shows the status by IP Source Guard conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status Example Show ACL status SWITCH gt security network acl status Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Description Show DHCP relay configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration 440 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Show DHCP relay configuration SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay configuration DHCP Relay Configuration DHCP Relay Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Server NULL DHCP Relay Information Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Information Policy replace Security Network DHCP Relay Mode Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relaly mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t fl
201. arameters lt view_name gt A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should excluded lt oid_subtree gt The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view Example Add SNMPv3 view entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp view add snmpv3_ view include 1 Security Switch SNMP View Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 view entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp view delete 3 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 view entry 416 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 view entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp view lookup View Type OID Subtree default_view included 2 snmpv3_viwe included Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP Access Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 access entry The entry index key are lt group_name gt lt security_model gt and lt security_level gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Add lt group_name gt lt security_model gt lt security_level gt lt read_view_name gt lt
202. ard_delay 1 2 Default Setting 20 Example Set STP maximum age time in 10 SWITCH gt stp maxage 10 STP FwdDelay Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge forward delay Syntax STP FwdDelay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt MSTP forward delay 4 30 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 15 461 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set STP forward delay value in 25 SWITCH gt stp fwddelay 25 STP CName Description Set or Show MSTP configuration name and revision Syntax STP CName lt config name gt lt integer gt Parameters lt config name gt MSTP Configuration name A text string up to 32 characters long Use quotes to embed spaces in name lt integer gt Integer value Default Setting Configuration name MAC address Configuration rev 0 Example Set MSTP configuration name and revision SWITCH gt stp cname 9f_ SGSW 24040 1 STP BPDU Filter Description Set or show edge port BPDU Filtering Syntax STP bpduFilter enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports Default Setting Disable 462 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set edge port BPDU filtering SWITCH gt stp bpdufilter enable STP BPDU Guard Description Set or show edge port BPDU Guard Syntax STP bpduGuard enable disable Parameters enable di
203. art gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window 3COM 3C940 Status General Support Connection Status Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Sent 53 Received Cab 146 938 760 110 212 126 Figure 4 11 18 262 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 3COM 3C940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network EAP type Protected EAP PEAP MD5 Challenge Protected EAP PEAP Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate as computer when computer information is available C Authenticate as quest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 11 19 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue 263 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Local Area Connection 3 x Click here to enter your user name and password for the network
204. at NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Description e EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X IEEE Name Direction Name Description Rx Total dotixAuthEapolFrames The number of valid EAPOL Rx frames of any type that have been received by the switch Rx Response ID dotixAuthEapolRespld The number of valid EAPOL FramesRx Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Rx Responses dotixAuthEapolRespFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Rx Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFra The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been 240 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series mesRx Rx Logoff dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr amesRx Rx Invalid Type dot1xAuthInvalidEapolF ramesRx Rx Invalid Length dot1xAuthEapLengthErr orFramesRx Tx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx Tx Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqldFr amesTx Tx Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFra mesTx received by the switch The
205. at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 8 Port Isolation Configuration Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other Promiscuous Public Servers m SGSW 24040 as Permit Promiscuous Se o gt Access Deny Access Deny Access Deny Private VLAN 138 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups E Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the pri
206. at the host IP address matched the entry e TELNET SSH Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry 269 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics This page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 3 appears Access Management Statistics Receive Packets Allow Packets Discard Packets D 0 HTTP 0 HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Auto Refresh O Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch e Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Allow Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately clear J Clear all statistics 270 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 4 HTTPs Configure HTTPS on this
207. ation Default Setting Authentication Method local Fallback disable Example Use RADIUS authentication method for telnet SWITCH gt security switch auth method telnet radius enable 392 Security Switch SSH Configuration Description Show SSH configuration Syntax Security Switch SSH Configuration Example Show SSH configuration SWITCH gt security switch ssh configuration SSH Mode Disabled Security Switch SSH Mode Description Set or show the SSH mode Syntax Security Switch SSH Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SSH disable Disable SSH default Show SSH mode Default Setting disable Example Enable SSH function User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security switch ssh mode enable 393 Security Switch HTTPs Configuration Description Show HTTPS configuration Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Configuration Default Setting disable Example Show HTTPs configuration SWITCH gt security switch https configuration HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Mode Disabled HTTPS Redirect Mode Disabled Security Switch HTTPs Mode Description Set or show the HTTPS mode Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs disable Disable HTTPs default Show HTTPs mode Default Setting disable Example Enable HTTPs function 394 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Ser
208. ation port aggregation VLAN Spanning Tree protocol QoS bandwidth control and IGMP snooping The Managed Switch provides 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Q in Q VLAN trunking and private VLAN The VLAN groups allowed on the Managed Switch will be maximally up to 255 Via supporting port aggregation the Managed Switch allows the operation of a high speed trunk to combine multiple ports up to eight groups of maximum to 8 ports for trunking and supports fail over as well Excellent Traffic Control The Managed Switch is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telecoms The functionality includes QoS features such as wire speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that are particular useful for multi tenant unit multi business unit Telco or Network Service Provide applications It also empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance at VoIP and video conferencing transmission 21 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Efficient Management For efficient management the Managed Switch series is equipped with console WEB and SNMP management interfaces With its built in Web based management it offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The Managed Switch supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software Fo
209. ation r duite L installation dans un rack ou armoire doit s effectuer de facon a ne pas emp cher la circulation d air n cessaire au bon fonctionnement de l quipement C Montage M canique La pose m canique de l quipement doit se faire de facon a viter un d s quilibre qui pourrait engendrer un danger D Surcharge des circuits faire attention lors de la connexion au circuit lectrique a ne pas surcharger les protections ni les c bles d alimentation Bien faire attention aux valeurs nominales marqu es sur l quipement E Mise ala terre Veuillez une bonne mise a la terre du rack dans lequel est mont l quipement II faut particuli rement y veiller lorsqu on utilise une alimentation de secours Revision PLANET 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP 24 100 1000 SFP Slots with 8 Shared TP Managed Stackable Switch User s Manual FOR MODELS SGSW 24040 SGSW 24240 Series REVISION 1 8 Feb 2014 Part No EM SGSW 24040_24240 Series 2080 A93070 007 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series TABLE OF CONTENTS TSINTRODU TION cian RR 20 Ti Packet Contes iii A Sinead a T a 20 1 2 Product Descr pi ON ea ten tice cette ect cersedee cece E rE a a a a aaa aa aaae a ae aaa Aaa ahaaa saat 21 1 3 How to Use This Manual coco ccoioiioi ii mnnn nn nnmnnn mnnn n ennnen nnmnnn nnmnnn nnne 23 1 4 Product ereiU ET E E E E E 25 1 5 Prod ct Specifications ies 28 2 NSTALLATI O N asia a a a a cae spac a
210. automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 250 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 11 8 RADIUS Details This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 9 appears RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Auto Refresh O Server 1 Y Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Other Info State Disable Round Trip Time O ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Responses Requests Malformed Responses Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Unknown Types Timeouts Packets Dropped 0 Other Info State Disable Round Trip Time O ms Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters
211. ay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The packets number that replaced received packets with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Optin The packets number that kept received packets with relay agent information option e Drop Agent Option The packets number that dropped received packets with relay agent information option Buttons Auto refresh cl Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refiesh _ clear J Clear all statistics Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone 81 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 10 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1 sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samles are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears CPU Load Auto refresh Y 100ms 3 1sec 1 10sec 1 all numbers running average 13 50 25 a LIA ls at WI A A Figure 4 2 13 CPU Load page screenshot Buttons Auto refresh d Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular inte
212. ayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Query by The query of the MAC addresses entry The following query types are supported Interface Query of the MAC addresses entry by interface 287 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN Query of the MAC addresses entry by VLAN MAC Address Query of the MAC addresses entry by MAC address e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refiesh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Car Flushes all dynamic entries Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 4 MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is grayed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a modu
213. backend server for this port left most table or client right most table 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the backend User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Tx Responses dotixAuthBackendResp onses server 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted e Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X M
214. by swapping Switch ID with another active switch When swapping two Switch IDs the devices will retain their own configuration except for the Switch ID Switches without an assigned Switch ID can only be assigned to any unused ID When assigning a Switch ID of an inactive switch to a new switch the new switch will inherit the former s configuration see Replacing a Switch above Deleting a switch will remove any configuration pertaining to it Deleting an active switch will leave it with an unassigned Switch ID until rebooted or manually assigning a Switch ID 4 17 1 2 Master Election Within a managed stack one master switch or just master must be elected Any switch not being master is a slave switch or just slave To elect a master the following criteria are evaluated sequentially 1 If any switch already claims to have been master for more than 30 seconds then that switch will become master 2 If multiple switches claim to have been master for more than 30 seconds then the switch which has been master for the longest period of time will become master The switch with the smallest master priority 4 The switch with the smallest MAC address The above algorithm ensures that once a master has been elected and has been master for more than 30 seconds it will remain master However in some cases the user may want to enforce a new master election 4 17 1 3 Stack Redundancy In the unlikely event that a
215. cation server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the 224 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are drop
216. cccccconnninnnnncarcrr rr 370 MAC CONTIQUEAION Luisa A A AA state E 370 MACAO ii iras 371 MAC peee a e ee 371 MAC LOOKUP isisisi tniii ia DiR 372 MAO Age MM ae 372 MAG Learning isis keen A ieee aes 373 MAC DUMP irarria n Ao 373 MAC Stati Stic usina ta tte 374 E m E E hectareas cado loca E A EA AE TE ATA AT 375 6 6 VLAN Configuration Command cnmmnncccccccnnnnnncrnrr nnmnnn nnmnnn nannan 376 VLAN ConfiguratiON iiiiai A e TN aa 376 MAW AYA DEE A PE o e EE AE eo te 376 VLAN Frame Type iii A e e a a e a gates 377 VLAN INES El a 377 VLAN Mode ai 378 VEAN LINK Types 0 a e e de do ee a O 378 VEAN QNO MOE ccoo eater 379 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN Ethernet Type is iii ais 380 MAING ANG Gl estes et e o SSL NES NR SI e ed o e eee 380 VLAN Delete sxc cmo e des ad lr tes electo e ce sere alo lo de ng ase a an 381 MAN LO le oe ee E a AG A ah ig 381 VLAN Status Ai 382 6 7 Private VLAN Configuration Command ccsseceesceeeeseeesneeeneeeeeeeeeesnaaeenseeeeseeeseaesaseeeeneeeeseeeseseaeeneeeees 384 PVLAN Configuration snes uid cntbes fe cwneds oa oe fade devbep date gdb seach kada iii 384 PMEAN AGC into adenda dada 385 PVEAN Delete coca cotaco tabs anio teca toldo acaso ando hg A dl do arado nel ld o tl A ad da 385 PVLAN EOQOKUP sii A a Ad dee an ee 386 PMVLAN Isolate 00 tddi 386 6 8 S Curity Comma hd aae Se cachet se eed ated te needle ete Ueda ces eaa ae deed aaea Een a aa aaran aa a aankaarten akae taninai 388
217. ceiving data over that port LNK ACT If 1000 LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down 38 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series HM 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 Function Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 SGSW 24040HP LED indication APLANET sasw 24040P Networking 4 Communication STX2 Console STX1 o o Master o 8 O o N 8 1 115200 Reset PWR Figure 2 6 SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 LED panel Function Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure Lights to indicate that the Switch is the Master of the stack group Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established M Alert LED Color Function Lights to indicate that the FAN3 failure 39 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series HE 10 100 1000Base T interfaces Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps or 1000Mbps 10 100 1000 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port LNK ACT ff If L10 100 NK ACT LED light gt indicate that t
218. ch The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object Description e Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US e State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture e County County parish gun Japan district e City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen e City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan e Block Neighborhood Neighborhood block e Street Street Example Poppelvej e Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N e Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW e Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz e House no House number Example 21 e House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University e Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing 299 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 Building Building structure Example Low Library Apartmen
219. ch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap security engine ID probe disable Disable SNMP trap security engine ID probe default Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap probe security engine id disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID Description Set or show SNMP trap security engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Example Set the SNMP trap security engine ID SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap security engine id 800007e5017f000011 409 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name Description Set or show SNMP trap security name Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name lt security_name gt Parameters lt security_name gt A string representing the security name for a principal default Show SNMP trap security name Example Set the SNMP trap security name SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap security name 12345678 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID Description Set or show SNMPv3 local engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt
220. cket loss will occur 541 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 7 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode If attached device is 100Base TX port will set to 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10Base T Full Duplex 100Mbps no auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100Base TX Full Duplex 542 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW What is PoE Based on the global standard IEEE 802 3af PoE is a technology for wired Ethernet the most widely installed local area network technology adopted today PoE allows the electrical power necessary for the operation of each end device to be carried by data cables rather than by separate power cords New network applications such as IP Cameras VoIP Phones and Wireless Networking can help enterprises improve productivity It minimizes wires that must be used to install the network for offering lower cost and less power failures IEEE802 3af also called Data Terminal equipment DTE power via Media dependent interfac
221. configuration of port 1 SWITCH gt security network nas configuration 1 802 1X Configuration Disabled Disabled Reauth Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout 30 10 Disabled Disabled Disabled z Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Security Network NAS Mode Description Set or show the global NAS enabledness 426 Syntax Security Network NAS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable 802 1X disable Globally disable 802 1X default Show current 802 1X global enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable IEEE802 1X function User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security network nas mode enable Security Network NAS State Description Set or show the port security state Syntax Security Network NAS State lt port_list gt autojauthorized unauthorized single multi macbased Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Port based 802 1X Authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed single Single Host 802 1X Authentication multi Multiple Host 802 1X Authentication macbased Switch authenticates on behalf of the client default Show 802 1X state Default Setting none 427 Example Show the port 1 security state SWITCH gt security network nas
222. d Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Voice VLAN Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN mode We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable Voice VLAN mode 527 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series disable Disable Voice VLAN mode default Show flow Voice VLAN mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the Voice VLAN mode User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt voice vian mode enable Voice VLAN ID Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN ID lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting 1000 Example Set ID 2 for Voice VLAN ID SWITCH gt voice vian id 2 Voice VLAN Agetime Description Set or show Voice VLAN age time Syntax Voice VLAN Agetime lt age_time gt 528 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 10000000 default Show age time Default Setting 86400sec Example Set Voice VLAN age time in 100sec SWITCH gt voice valn agetime 100 Voice VLAN Traffic Class Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN Traffic Class lt class gt Parameters
223. d Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter HDC Power Connector The rear panel of the SGSW 24040R contains a power switch and a DC power connector which accepts DC power input voltage from 30V to 60V DC Connect the power cable to the Managed Switch at the input terminal block The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3 5 POWER ON Ensure the power switch in the OFF position before conmect the DC wire ee Figure 2 13 Rear Panel of SGSW 24040R Before connecting the DC power cable to the input terminal block of SGSW 24040R ensure that the saming power switch is in the OFF position and the DC power is OFF Stack ports SGSW 24040 24040R Series There are two high performance stack ports on the rear panel One is STX1 Cascade Down and the other is STX2 Cascade UP When stacked the STX1 Cascade Down port should connect to the other switch s STX2 Cascade UP port and the STX2 Cascade UP port should connect to the other switch s STX1 Cascade Down out You can just use the attached PLANET CB STX50 or longer stack cable CB STX200 connector to stack The CB STX50 and CB STX200 are Cross over HDMI cables only attached PLANET stack cable can be used Plug and play connection 43 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SIX2V Cascade Down Cascade Up Figure 2 14 SGSW 24040 24040R Series Stack Ports
224. d and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 12 amp Figure 4 7 13appears MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI MSTI Y Figure 4 7 12 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detailed configuration 165 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration Stack Global MSTI Normal Ports Configuration for Switch 1 Path Cost Auto Y Port Path Cost iii ala alaala PPRBRSKE EDIEDI HJE NN t p oO hm gt gll ellei e JHHHE co SES Es 3 3 HIE PEBRE ABBE 13 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot 7 Figure 4 166 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended value
225. d from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 115 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs
226. d it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In this case field in the default IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Managed Switch s 802 1x system configuration 12345678 at this case 1 Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration Timeout ame seconds Dead Time Time seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration 192 168 0 253 290000000 Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Server Configuration screenshot 2 Add New RADIUS Cleint on the Windows 2003 server 257 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Internet Authentication Service File Action View Help e menre gt Internet Authentication Service Local fem FRADIUS Clients a Remote Acce New RADIUS Client EA Remote Acce Connection R 3 CATest 192 168 0 5 RADIUS ew gt l View b Refresh Export List Help New Client 0 Pp
227. d target ports for mirroring This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears Speed Port Configuration for Switch 1 Flow Control Configured Current Rx Current Tx Configured Maximum Frame Excessive Collision Mode Power Control Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto The page includes the following fields Object Description KKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKK XK sK EEE ES ES EES ES EES ESE SES aaa ae CSS NSH NSH EEE EI EIEI SS SL OOOOOOO0O00000000000000000 KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK XK Reich Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration page screenshot e Port This is the logical port number for this row 106 Description User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Indicates the per port description Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down Current
228. de is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled e TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertising messages Valid values are in the range of 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertising message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range of 100 to 86400 17 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Y Bac Y B P Search gt Folders EJ Address my Network Places Network Tasks 2 Add a network place view network connections Y Set up a wireless network For a home or small office G Search Active Directory Print Server Print Server RDM HPSO00 RDM
229. decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and the other with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 5 appears 271 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SSH Configuration Mode Dista Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 6 Port Security Status This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a lege
230. decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az 555 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a
231. ded use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media e Policy Policy Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently 305 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series unknown Defined The network policy is defined e TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 Buttons Refresh Click to refresh
232. default QoS class for the port that is the QoS class for frames not matching any of the QCEs in the QCL e QCL Select which QCL to use for the port e Tag Priority Select the default tag priority for this port when adding a Tag to the untagged frames e Queuing Mode Select which Queuing mode for this port e Queue Weighted Setting Queue weighted Low Normal Medium High if the Queuing Mode is Weighted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 5 Bandwidth Control Configure the switch port rate limit for Polices and Shapers on this page The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen Bandwidth Control in Figure 4 9 10 appears 197 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Rate Limit Configuration for Switch 1 Policer Enabled Policer Rate Policer Unit Shaper Enabled Shaper Rate Shaper Unit 1 O O 500 kbps v 0 O 1010M 2 WwW N SS NSS S SSNS O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OO BDBODODODOODOOODOoOOoooooO SSNS HS S SS SSS SN SS Figure 4 9 10 Rate Limit Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e
233. dicates the SNMP access source address e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons _ Add new commaunity Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 99 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 3 5 2 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 Users Configuration User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password oO 800007e5017f000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Add new user Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration page screenshot Delete Engine ID The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine ID A octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should
234. different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP 553 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP serve
235. duce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE7 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection making sure the manager PC must be set on the same the IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the SGSW Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC SGSW Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser IP Address 192 168 0 100 TS f UTP Cable Lay IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 62 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series m Logging on the switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address is as follows http 192 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default usernam
236. e Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without pressing the OK button after the image has been loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 88 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 17 Configuration Backup This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Backup screen in Figure 4 2 21 appears Configuration Backup Save configuration except IP Address Figure 4 2 21 Configuration Backup page screenshot You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags lt xml version 1 0 gt and lt configuration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file Section tags lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports Module tags lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt etc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the configuration Group tags lt port_table gt lt vlan_table gt etc T
237. e MDI is an international standard to define the transmission for power over Ethernet The 802 3af is delivering 48V power over RJ 45 wiring Besides 802 3af also define two types of source equipment Mid Span and End Span E Mid Span Mid Span device is placed between legacy switch and the powered device Mid Span is tap the unused wire pairs 4 5 and 7 8 to carry power the other four is for data transmit E End Span End Span device is direct connecting with power device End Span could also tap the wire 1 2 and 3 6 PoE System Architecture The specification of PoE typically requires two devices the Powered Source Equipment PSE and the Powered Device PD The PSE is either an End Span or a Mid Span while the PD is a PoE enabled terminal such as IP Phones Wireless LAN etc Power can be delivered over data pairs or spare pairs of standard CAT 5 cabling How Power is Transferred Through the Cable A standard CAT5 Ethernet cable has four twisted pairs but only two of these are used for 10BASE T and 100BASE T The specification allows two options for using these cables for power shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3 The spare pairs are used Figure 2 shows the pair on pins 4 and 5 connected together and forming the positive supply and the pair on pins 7 and 8 connected and forming the negative supply In fact a late change to the spec allows either polarity to be used 543 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Figure 8
238. e admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Connect to 192 168 0 100 The server 192 168 0 100 at Web Management requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin Password PEPEE C Remember my password Figure 4 1 2 Login screen Default User Name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 63 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series PLANET Natevrtieg amp Comerstication SGSW 24040P L M SGSW 24040P v Welcome to PLANET SGSW 24040P 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP Management Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email sales planet com tw Copyright 2010 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 3 Default main page Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides 1 It is recom
239. e Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial ln User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authenti
240. e QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VL
241. e RSTP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The STP CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 9 appears 159 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series STP CIST Ports Configuration CIST Aggregated Ports Configuration Stack Global ora ls au Path Cost ae Admin Edge Auto Edge frole ren PPP Guard Point to point Auto 128 v Forced Tue Y CIST Normal Ports Configuration for Switch 1 Restricted oes Path Cost priori Admin Edge Auto Edge frole pec BPDU Guard Point to point E E 0 0 000 hh wh 118 18 161 681 581 181 158 581 801 5801 81158 1801 1081 81 ES 158 801 ES EIEI RRA RR RRE S S Sy 1811 1 581 YS 158 81 81 1581 81158 801 1681 81 I 801 681 EIEE dE ER ES E O E ES EE SA AR AAA SAA A 000000000000000000000000 Edo fijo fe fe fede ede fed fee fee fede fede ee 11 181 581 581 811581 5801 801 EIEI ENEI EMEI 1581 581 15801 81 811581 SIS ES MENEE EIEEE 18 81 801 EIEI ENEE IEN ES 158 1801 6811 EIEI Figure 4 7 9 STP CIST Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the followi
242. e blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions a Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements a Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups a Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree a Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used E The unique switch identifier E The path cost to
243. e error counters for receive and transmit The Detailed Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Detailed Port Statistics for Switch 1 Port 1 Auto Refresh Refresh Clear Port Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx Unicast Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Receive Size Counters Transmit Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Rx Low Rx Normal Rx Medium Rx High Tx Low Tx Normal Tx Medium Tx High Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Tx Drops Tx Late Exc Coll Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 page screenshot The page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Description e Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits e Rx and Tx Unicast
244. e following modes e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however _ Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters 245 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 11 6 Authentication Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers The Authentication Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 7 appears Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration 49 Figure 4 11 7 Authentication Server Configuration page screenshot 246 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Port State These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers Object Description e Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not r
245. e forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 15 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled e Logging Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE 209 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row O Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list Deletes the ACE The lowest plus sign adds a n
246. e it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue 561 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used main
247. e the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care 217 e TCP URG m Ethernet Type Parameters User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object Description e EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can
248. e used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong 125 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features E Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 10 standard a Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protoc
249. eb pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two
250. eceived within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch 247 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series RADIUS Accounting Se
251. ecks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period Port Configuration If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch The table has one row for each port on
252. ed client must be Period reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time between retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Age Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802 1X based mode this is not so criticial since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age 229 User s Manu
253. edence part of ToS 3 bits when Mapping receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets e Set up VLAN Tag Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value 3 bits when receiving Priority Mapping VLAN tagged packets Buttons Next Click to continue the wizard 186 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 9 2 1 Set up Policy Rules Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen in Figure 4 9 2 appears Set up Policy Rules for Switch 1 Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies Ww i o 2 z E JE o a 00000000000000000000000O 900000000OOOOOOOVOVOVOVO AJOOooooo0o0oo0000000000000000 900000000000000000000000O R 90000000000000000000000O 23 90000000000000000000000 2900000000000000000000000 f00000000000000000000000 8f9 0000000000000000000000 2f9000000000000000000000O 00000000000000000000000 600000O0OOOOOODODOOODODO 600000O0OODOOOOODOOODODO 0000000000000 09O 0000000 3 00000000000000000000000O 900000000000000000000000 9000000000000000000000O 9000000000000 OVOOVOVOVO 90000000000000000000000O 9000000000000 OODODODOVO 90000000000000000000000O 90000000000 OOOVOOVOVOVOVO nN 0000O0OOOOOVOOOOOOVOVOVOVO iL izard W Cancel Figure 4 9 2 Set up Policy Rules page screenshot The page
254. eecsartcetebans arica een 398 Security SWitch AcCess LOOKUP ii ti 398 Security Switch Access Clea iii secede deeded escie cbse ae e iiad d e a addii 398 Security Switch Access Statistics issiria E E ER 399 Security Switch SNMP Configuration stirita ina nono ncnn aaaea ia aidea rre 399 Security Switch SNMP Mode eeeececeeeneee cence eeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeesneeeeeeeaeeeeneaeeesneeeeeneneeeeeeaaes 401 Security Switch SNMP Version 402 Security Switch SNMP Read Community c cccooocccccococcnononcnonononcno nono nonnno cnn crono cnn rn n nn rn 402 Security Switch SNMP Write Community ccooonocnnococinonoccnonononcno nono conan non crono cnn ran nr nan rre nn nr rre 403 Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode oooccococccccococccononononononcncnono nono non n nn canon rn rn nn aata ea e Kiara EA rare 403 11 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Switch SNMP Trap VersiON oononocccnnoncnnnoncccnononcncnono nono nono cc nn no nn r rra 404 Security Switch SNMP Trap Community ccccooocccnnoncccnononcncnono nono nono nnnn no nn nn nono rca r nn nn 404 Security Switch SNMP Trap DestinatiON oooonoonnnncccnnnociccnonacnnononconanonnnnnono cnn ono n nn nano rr rre 405 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination o ooooononncnnnociconoccconononnnnnnno cnn n nono nc nn no nn r rro rca 405 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure ooocononncnnniccnnnonocononacnnononcncnnnorr rr nn nn cnn nn cnn rr rr 406 Sec
255. eeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaeeesneeeeeeaeeeeeneeeesneeeeeeaas 100 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration sses ssassn ade 102 4 3 5 4 SNMPv3 Views Configurations scnis iiini dae cheeses 103 4 3 5 5 SNMPv3 Accesses COnfiguUratiON oiconsicncinnc ci kvadra iuda beteki ieaiaia renauit 104 4 4 Port MANAGE Mecca 106 4 41 Port Configura aiii ias 106 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview EEE TE TTEA E E OTTAEN 108 4 4 3 Port Statistics Detail ve ee ieee ede sh ei eed 109 4 4 4 SFP Module Information viii aia A ios 111 4 4 5 Port Mirroring Configuratio seeiis raiped erie edadia eana ridan dida peiie lares 113 4 5 EinkAggregati Nis ziokoak raaa andapan aao aaa raea aen araua S Kuara o ad 116 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 5 1 Static Aggregation Configuration oonoocccconociconococcnononnncnanonnnn nono nnn nn untk nano rra r rn nn n rra rre EEEa annene 118 4 5 2 LACP COUTO cir innatos 120 4 5 3 LACP System Status tii acti 121 E ee A ee he ee dre See ea 122 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics 1 wack van ae ee Wa i ee 124 O VIAN a dt A ti 125 4 6 1 VEAN Ove NEW inaran a e a e a dda a tes e a d eda a a iai 125 4 6 2 IEEE 8021Q VEAN decrece ennnen oeae neurean Ee Eau ana eaae AeKa andaan eenaa aaa il 125 4 0 3 VLAN BasicIntormatio m siei a tits 129 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration sieren eai i ia a iada iia adai aei 130 4 6 5 VLAN Membership Configuration ooononcccninnnnnnnoccccnnnonnnonononnnn nono cnn ano n n
256. efault Show flow DHCP snooping port mode Default Setting trusted Example Set untrusted DHCP snooping port mode in port 1 SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping port mode 1 untrusted Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP snooping statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear DHCP snooping statistics Example Show DHCP snooping statistics of port 1 SWITCH gt security network dhcp snooping siatistics 1 Port 1 Statistics O Tx Discover O Tx Offer O Tx Request O Tx Decline 0 Tx ACK 0 Tx NAK O Tx Release 0 Tx Inform 446 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Rx Lease Query O Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned O Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown O Tx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active O Tx Lease Active Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Description Show IP source guard configuration Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Example Show IP source guard configuration SWITCH gt security network ip source guard configuration IP Source guard Configuration IP Source Guard Mode Disabled Port Port Mode Dynamic Entry Limit Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disab
257. efault TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP LLDP Port Configuration shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors
258. el color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not bel
259. emented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a 255 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4670 Name Description State Round Trip Time radiusAccClientExtRo undTripTime 256 Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matche
260. enable 474 IGMP Leave Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IGMP Leave Proxy Syntax IGMP Leave Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy disable Disable IGMP Leave Proxy default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP leave proxy User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt igmp leave proxy enable IGMP State Description Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN Syntax IGMP State lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting enable 475 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Disable VID 1 SWITCH gt igmp state 1 disable IGMP Querier Description Set or show the IGMP snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IGMP Querier lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP querier disable Disable IGMP querier default Show IGMP querier mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the IGMP snooping querier mode for VLAN SWITCH gt igmp querier 1 enable IGMP Fastleave Description Set or show the IGMP snooping fast leave port mode Syntax IGMP Fastleave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list
261. enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears e Ethernet Type Value Buttons Save Click to save changes When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 4 appears 218 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ACL Ports Configuration for Switch 1 Port Potcy 10 Action Rate Limiter 1D Port copy Loguing Shutdown Counter Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v Permit v lt felele lt lt felel lt Al ES oo on oo nk WN lt lt A Q lt E 0 0 ho 0 0 0 ho 0 ho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n lt in E in a
262. entially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular 154 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward A LAN 1 gt Port cost 200 000 Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B c Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 _ gt A LAN 3 gt Figure 4 7 5 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used 155 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port c Designated Bridge F
263. entry Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object Description e IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears 214 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file e IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value e IP TTL Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t
264. eo video_si gnaling tagged untagged lt vlan_id gt lt I2_priority gt lt dscp gt Parameters voice Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications voice_signaling Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media guest_voice Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and 496 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services guest_voice_signaling Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media softphone_voice Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN video_conferencing Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services streaming_video Strea
265. er s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 15 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled e CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons Combined w Refresh hs l Select the ACL status from this drop down list Click to refresh the page any changes made locally
266. er Gigabit port Max 290 watts Max 430 2 watts Max 432 watts Power Consumption 989 BTU 1467 BTU 1473 BTU Power over Ethernet Per Port 48V DC Per Port 52V DC PoE Power Output Max 15 4 watts Max 30 8 watts Power Pin Assignment 1 2 3 6 Number of PD O POE Ability 7 Watts 33 Number of PD 15 4 Watts Number of PD 30 8 Watts Layer 2 Function User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series E Basic Management Interfaces Console Telnet Web Browser SNMPv1 v2c and v3 Secure Management Interface SSH SSL SNMP v3 Port Configuration Port Trunking IGMP Snooping Access Control List Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status trunk status 802 1Q Tagged based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups Q in Q Private VLAN Voice VLAN IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk Support 12 groups of 16 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 4 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority DS TOS field in IP Packet IGMP v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Querier mode support IP based ACL MAC based ACL Up to 256 entries RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Inter
267. er anufacturer B Reduced Air Flow Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised C Mechanical Loading Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading D Circuit Overloading Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern E Reliable Earthing Reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment should be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit e g use of power strips Attention Cet quipement ne doit tre connect qu a un r seau PoE sans routage vers l ext rieur Instructions de montage Les instructions de montage dans un rack ou dans un espace similaires sont incluses dans le manuel d installation A Milieu de fonctionnement Si install dans un milieu clos ou rassembl dans un rack la temp rature ambiante dans ce dernier peut tre plus lev e que celle de la salle II est recommand d installer l quipement dans un environnement et des temp ratures compatibles avec les sp cifications du fabricant B A r
268. er name that this entry should belong to Example Delete test account SWITCH gt security switch users delete user Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Description Show privilege configuration Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Example Show privilege level SWITCH gt security switch privilege level configuration Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Current Level 15 Group Name Privilege Level CRO CRW SRO SRW 389 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 5 10 5 10 15 15 15 15 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 15 15 15 15 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 1 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 1 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 Security Switch Privilege Level Group Description Configure a privilege level group Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Group lt group_name gt lt cro gt lt crw gt lt sro gt lt srw gt Parameters lt group_name gt Privilege group name default Show all group privilege level lt cro gt lt Crw gt lt sro gt lt Srw gt Configuration read only privilege level 1 15 Configuration Execute read write privilege level 1 15 Status Statistics read only privilege level 1 15 Status Statistics read write privilege level 1 15 390 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Cha
269. eries PoE Maximum Power Description Set or show PoE maximum power per port 0 30 8 with one digit Syntax PoE Maximum_Power lt port_list gt lt port_power gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt port_power gt PoE maiximum power for the port 0 30 8 Default Setting 30 8 Example Set maximum power in 10 watts for port1 4 SWITCH gt poe maximum_power 1 4 10 PoE Allocated Power Description Set or show PoE maximum power allocated per port 0 30 8 with one digit Syntax PoE Alloc_Power lt port_list gt lt alloc_power gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt alloc_power gt PoE maiximum power allocated for the port 0 30 8 Default Setting 30 8 Example Set PoE maximum power allocated in 10 watts for port1 4 SWITCH gt poe alloc_power 1 4 10 503 PoE Power Supply Description Set or show the value of the power supply Syntax PoE Power_Supply lt supply_power gt Parameters lt supply_power gt PoE power for a power supply Example Set 200 watts of power supply User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt poe power_supply 200 PoE Status Description Show PoE status Syntax PoE Status 504 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 16 Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax
270. es Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled e Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Buttons e Restart Refresh Save Click to refresh the page Click to save changes Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will n
271. estination Filter Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP UDP Destination Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames wher
272. eters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx default Show OUI address Example Lookup Voice VLAN OUI entry SWITCH gt voice vian oui lookup Voice VLAN Port Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Port Mode lt port_list gt disable auto force Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disjoin from Voice VLAN auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically force Forced join to Voice VLAN default Show Voice VLAN port mode Default Setting disable 531 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set auto mode for port 1 4 of Voice VLAN port mode SWITCH gt voice vlan port mode 1 4 auto Voice VLAN Security Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Syntax Voice VLAN Security lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Voice VLAN security mode disable Disable Voice VLAN security mode default Show flow Voice VLAN security mode Default Setting disable Examp
273. etting disable Example Enable limit aging SWITCH gt security network limit aging enable Security Network Limit Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on learned MAC addresses Syntax Security Network Limit Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address 10 10000000 seconds default Show current age time Default Setting 3600 Example Set age time in 100sec SWITCH gt security network limit agetime 100 Security Network Limit Port Description Set or show per port enabledness 423 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Security Network Limit Port lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port security on this port disable Disable port security on this port default Show current port enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Example Enable port limit for port 1 SWITCH gt security network limit port 1 enable Security Network Limit Limit Description Set or show the max number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this set of ports Syntax Security Network Limit Limit lt port_list gt lt limit gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt limit gt Max number of MAC addresses on this port default Sh
274. etting 0 Example Set priority7 for port 3 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt qos tagprio 3 7 QoS QCL Port Description Set or show the port QCL ID Syntax QoS QCL Port lt port_list gt lt qcl_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt qcl_id gt QCLID Default Setting 1 Example Set QCL ID5 for port10 SWITCH gt qos qcl port 10 5 QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is not specified the QCE will be placed last in the list Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt etype lt etype gt vid lt vid gt port lt udp_tcp_port gt dscp lt dscp gt tos lt tos_list gt tag_prio lt tag_prio_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 lt qce_id_next gt Next QCE ID 1 24 etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type vid VLAN ID keyword lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 port UDP TCP
275. ew entry at the bottom of the ACE listings Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Click to clear the counters Remove All Click to remove all ACEs 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears 210 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ACE Configuration L Disable v Disable Frame Type Disable 4 Disable MAC Parameters VLAN Parameters _DMAC Filter Any v VLAN ID Filter Any v Tag Priority Any v i Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 e Switch Select the Switch for this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any Switch
276. face MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB 34 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port Trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet Pre Standard Note The PoE network of this equipment is to be connected without routing to the outside plant 35 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network de
277. fic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing t
278. following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Round Trip radiusAuthClient The time interval measured in milliseconds between Time ExtRoundTripTim the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and e the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet RADIUS Accounting Servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description Rx Responses radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS Responses packets valid or invalid
279. for 100sec SWITCH gt security network nas eapoltimeout 100 Security Network NAS Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax Security Network NAS Agetime lt age_time gt 429 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks for activitiy on a MAC address that succeeded autentication default Show current age time Default Setting 300 Example Set NAS age time in 1000sec SWITCH gt security network nas agetime 1000 Security Network NAS Holdtime Description Time in seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Security Network NAS Holdtime lt hold_time gt Parameters lt hold_time gt Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire default Show current hold time Default Setting 10 Example Set NAS hold time in 100sec SWITCH gt security network nas holdtime 100 Security Network NAS RADIUS QoS Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned QoS Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS global lt port_list gt enable disable 430 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned QoS setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned QoS setting defaul
280. for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy bac
281. g and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server 557 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all o
282. g length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add new user Click to add a new user entry Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 101 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears The page includes the following fields SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Object public default_ro_group private default_rw_group public default_ro_group private default_rw_group default_user default rw_group Ae Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration page screenshot Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add new group Save e Group Name Click to save changes A string identifying the group name that this entry
283. ge of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software 222 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options m Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS m Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS m Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch
284. grows Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network Manage network congestion QoS Terminology Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic
285. gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or auto Default auto Example Set MSTI7 in port1 SWITCH gt stp msti port cost 7 1 Port Path Cost 472 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series STP MSTI Port Priority Description Set or show the STP CIST MSTI port priority Syntax STP Msti Port Priority lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt priority gt STP port priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 473 6 10 Multicast Configuration Command IGMP Configuration Description Show IGMP snooping configuration Syntax IGMP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show IGMP snooping configuration User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt igmp configuration IGMP Mode Description Set or show the IGMP snooping mode Syntax IGMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting Disabled Example Enable IGMP mode SWITCH gt igmp mode
286. gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP fast leave disable Disable IGMP fast leave 476 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series default Show IGMP fast leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the IGMP snooping fast leave port mode SWITCH gt igmp fastleave 1 enable IGMP Throttling Description Set or show the IGMP port throttling status Syntax IGMP Throttling lt port_list gt limit group number Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 0 No limit 1 10 Group learn limit default Show IGMP Port Throttling Default Setting unlimited Example Set the IGMP port throttling status for port 1 SWITCH gt igmp throttling 1 10 IGMP Filtering Description Set or show the IGMP port group filtering list Syntax IGMP Filtering lt port_list gt add del group_addr 477 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port group filtering entry del Del existing port group filtering entry default Show IGMP port group filtering list IP multicast group address a b c d Default Setting No filtering Example Set the IGMP port group filtering list for port 1 SWITCH gt igmp filtering 1 add 239 0 0 1 IGMP Router Description Set or show the IGMP snooping router port mode Syntax IGMP Router lt port_l
287. guration Syntax Show ip 537 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Show LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax Show lacp Show LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax Show lldp Show MAC Configuration Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax Show MAC Show Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Show mirror Show PoE Configuration Description Show PoE configuration 538 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Show PoE Show Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Show port Show Private VLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax Show pvlan Show QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax Show QoS Show SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Show SNMP 539 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Show Stack Configuration Description Show the list of switches in stack Syntax Show stack Show System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax Show system Show VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax Show vlan Show STP Configuration Description Show STP Port configuration Syntax Show STP 540 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series
288. gure 4 2 26 appears Factory Default Are you sure to reset the configuration to Factory Default The default configuration here doesn t involve IP address You can reset configuration included IP by means of pushing the reset button on the machine Yes Figure 4 2 26 Factory Default page screenshot Buttons Yes Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration After the Factory button is pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as follows Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel for about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx Networking amp Communication e PLANET scsw 24040 En i SIX2 0 CM Master Y Oo 115200 N 8 1 y PWR e ACT 401000 Y 0 10 100 o 2 Console sSx10 O o 1 o Hardware Reset button 92 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 20 System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed users have to re login the WEB interface for about 60 seco
289. gure through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 14 appears 203 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Voice VLAN Configuration Stack Global Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Disabled Disabled 12 13 14 15 Disabled Disabled 16 17 Disabled Disabled 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 Figure 4 9 14 Voice VLAN Configuration page screenshot 204 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Description e Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Age Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class
290. h a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependant Interface Media Dependant Interface Cross 550 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series as E The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable SIDE 1 SIDE2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 1 White Orange 2 Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 3 White Green 4 Blue 4 Blue 5 White Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 6 Green Be Be Be ee Se BS Te 7 White Brown 7 White Brown SIDE 2 8 Brown 8 Brown Crossover Cable SIDE 1 SIDE2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 1 White Green 2 Orange 2 Green 3 White Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 4 Blue 5 White Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 6 Orange De ee 28S a rs SB RS 7 White Brown 7 White Brown SIDE 2 8 Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable Please make sure you
291. h an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy e Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003
292. h as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet 174 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 5 appears IGMP Snooping Configuration Stack Global Settings Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMC Flooding enabled C Leave Proxy Enabled O LAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier O 1 Figure 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered IPMC Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMC traffic flooding Leave Proxy Enable Enable the leave proxy VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Buttons IGMP Querier Save Click to save changes Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN The Querier will send out if no Querier received in 255 seconds after IGMP Querier Enabled Each Querier s interval is 125 second and it will stop act as an IGMP Querier if received any Querier from other devices Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously
293. hat provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Pro
294. he following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized 231 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed
295. he port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps If LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Lights To indicate the port is providing 48VDC in line power Off To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powered Device PD HM 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 Function Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down SGSW 24240 SGSW 24240R LED indication e PLANET sasw 24240 Stack 1D Networking Communication STX2 0 Console aes o o y E 0 MEDI 0 gt 115200 N 8 1 2 PWR lt e ACT A 1000 Figure 2 7 SGSW 24240 SGSW 24240R LED panel M System Function Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure Master Green Lights to indicate that the Switch is the Master of the stack group 40 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series STX1 ES Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established STX2 Green Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established Hi 10 100 1000Base T interfaces Shared Port 1 Port 8 Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps 1000 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port LN
296. he switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration This page allows you to configure how an administrator is authenticated when he logs into the switch via TELNET SSH or the web pages The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 3 appears Authentication Method Configuration Authentication Method Fallback console telnet ssh Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration page screenshot 226 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values None authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to something else than none or local Buttons
297. hese methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management 57 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SGSW Managed Switch PC Workstation with Terminal emulation software lt TD _ Cia RS 232 15 LW Serial Port Serial Port 115200 8 n 1 Figure 3 1 Console management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are E 115200 bps 8 data bits E No parity E 1 stop bit COM Properties Port Settings Bits per second JAEN Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Figure 3 2 Terminal parameter settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal
298. hese tags identify a group of parameters typically a table Parameter tags lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch The examples below show a small configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic Save Configuration 1 Press the Save Configuration button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figures 4 2 22 and 4 2 23 appear 89 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series File Download Do you want to open or save this file E Name ntent length_18058Server__PLANET_Web_Server Type XML Document 17 6KB From 192 168 0 100 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or 2 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially save this file What s the risk Figure 4 2 22 File Download screen 2 Chose the file save path in m
299. hether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave 173 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Report Received Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions Delaying Member Idle Member E IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service ES Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol suc
300. his Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for User Static page screenshot 136 The page includes the following fields User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 e VLAN Aware Show the VLAN Awareness for the port If VLAN awareness is enabled the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed e Ingress Filtering Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded e Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded e Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged e UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UV
301. hows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 3 LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears LACP System Status Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Key Last Changed Local Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Auto Refresh C Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 121 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh E i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the p
302. i GBIC Slots 24 100 1000Base X Dual Speed SFP interfaces Smerte pa nai O 30 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Share Data Buffer 1392 kilobytes Switch Processing Scheme Store and Forward IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Flow Control Back pressure for Half Duplex lt 5 seconds System reboot Reset Button gt 10 seconds Factory Default Dimensions W x D x H 440 x 200 x 44 5 mm 1U high SGSW 24040 3 0kg SGSW 24040R 3 1kg Power Link Act and speed per Gigabit port Power Requirements AC AC 100 240V 50 60Hz AC 100 240V 50 60Hz 48V DC 0 6A Power Requirements DC Range 30 60V Layer 2 Function Basic Management Interfaces Console Telnet Web Browser SNMPv1 v2c and v3 Secure Management Interface SSH SSL SNMP v3 Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Port Configuration Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status flow control status auto negotiation status and trunk status 802 1Q Tagged based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups Q in Q Private VLAN Voice VLAN IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk did Support 12 groups of 16 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 4 level priority for switching 31 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Port Number 802 1p priority DS TOS field in I
303. i is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 11i standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected_Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia 568 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series WPA Radius
304. iate Leave d cc A ia 524 6 22 Voice VLAN COMMANA A a conde cease ae e a r a ea a aaae ereer aa eee te aeaa ae e aeaea EE ea E aeea 526 Voice VLAN C nfig fatioM ieten inn atia diia 526 VOICE VLAN Mode rrm a a e e a a ds 527 VOICE VLAN ID 0 e o a bdo dt 528 Voice VEAN ADGEUIME ads 528 Voice VLAN Traffic Clas is 529 Voice VLAN QUL Addy cai e ll ed doe e de do de 529 Voice VLAN OUI Delete iieiea atp aaant td aaa anait eaaa 530 Voice VLAN OULGIEa To re u ia 530 Voice VLAN QUI Look psicsiuisenie iiiu ia adas 531 Voice VLAN Port Modena tia 531 Voice VLAN S Curity annajona A aid teed cates 532 6 23 SMTP Command 533 SMTP Configurations rsi eisein pbeecs erinra dad iia 533 SIMI MOCEY 2 asc oe cesta ent oes kts he creed dl al od e E ea ted oe sede cade he a hdd Aad od o ia ont 533 17 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SMTP SOMO ioiei a ae eri a sean aa eaa sue does cecdessuaedendetsa ceucieeedasstesuunsuesveeeeesun Sous 533 SMTP AE a E E E E E EE E T E EE E E E o 534 SMTP AU USO mt a e e aa Si o de 534 SIVANA aN pass EE E EA TOT E E A TOTE E 535 SMTP Mailfromicniat nica nett ai ed i ee eed 535 SMTP MailSbjectisss eacn fsa tha A A eae tion Dig Beene nd yeas 535 SMTP Mallo Misco cadalso aada 536 SMTP MAINO 0000 A A Arde 536 6 24 SNOW COMMA jo 0 A A da 537 Show ACL Configuration iii tii 537 Show Link Aggregation Configuration cccccccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeceeeeeecaaaaeceeeeeseceeaeeeeeeesec
305. ic MSTP point2point detection 468 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Default auto Example Disable STP P2P function on port1 SWITCH gt stp port p2p 1 disable STP Port RestrictedRole Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedRole port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedRole lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted role disable Disable MSTP restricted role Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted role on port1 SWITCH gt sip port restrictedrole 1 enable STP Port RestrictedTcn Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedTcn lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 469 enable Enable MSTP restricted TCN disable Disable MSTP restricted TCN Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted TCN on port1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt sip port restrictedtcn 1 enable STP Port bpduGuard Description Set or show the bpduGuard port parameter Syntax STP Port bpduGuard lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port BPDU Guard disable Disable port BPDU Guard Default disable Example Eisable BPDU guard on port1 SWITCH gt stp
306. ice or IGMP querier The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router port E Auto Select Auto to have the Managed Switch automatically uses the port as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets a Static The Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP Router port Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port a None The Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP Router port The Managed Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port Use this mode when you connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non querier Managed Switch and don t want the multicast stream be flood to uplink switch throught the port that connected to the IGMP querier e Fast Leave Enable the Fast Leave on the port e Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values ga If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Note 4 8 4 VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 999 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from
307. icmp ICMP keyword lt icmp_type gt ICMP type number 0 255 or any lt icmp_code gt ICMP code number 0 255 or any udp UDP keyword lt sport gt Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any lt dport gt Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any tcp TCP keyword lt tcp_flags gt TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable 438 lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Security Network ACL Delete Description Delete ACE Syntax Security Network ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 128 Example Delete ACE 1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security network acl delete 1 Security Network ACL Lookup Description Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax Security Network ACL Lookup lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 128 Example Lookup ACE 1 SWITCH gt security network acl lookup 1 Security Network ACL Clear Description Clear all ACL counters 439 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Security Network ACL Clear Example Clear all ACL counters SWITCH gt security network acl cle
308. ield For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 web WEB HTTPS interface snmp SNMP interface telnet TELNET SSH interface default Show configured and current mode Example Add access management list from 2001 0001 to 2001 0100 via web interface SWITCH gt security switch access add 2001 0001 2001 0100 web 397 Security Switch Access Delete Description Delete access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Delete lt access_id Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Delete access management ID 1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security switch access delete 1 Security Switch Access Lookup Description Lookup access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Lookup lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Lookup access management entry SWITCH gt security switch access lookup 1 Security Switch Access Clear Description Clear access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Clear 398 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Clear access management entry SWITCH gt security switch access clear Security Swi
309. ies User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security switch https mode enable Security Switch HTTPs Redirect Description et or show the HTTPS redirect mode Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Redirect enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs redirect disable Disable HTTPs redirect default Show HTTPs redirect mode Default Setting disable Example Enable HTTPs redirect function SWITCH gt security switch https redirect enable Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Example Show access management configuration SWITCH gt security switch access configuration Access Mgmt Configuration 395 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series System Access Mode Disabled System Access number of entries 0 Security Switch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management default Show access management mode Default Setting disable Example Enable access management function SWITCH gt security switch access mode enable Security Switch Access Add Description Add access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access
310. ies User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 3 5 SNMP based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public SGSW Managed Switch SNMP Agent Status Enabled PC Workstation with a SNMP application Ci A IP Address 192 168 0 x AN IP Address a 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 5 SNMP management 61 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to re
311. igure 4 7 6 After Applying the STA Rules The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 4 7 2 STP Bridge Configuration This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatible Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spa
312. in a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer O OR OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs 560 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally un
313. inally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Data Old CRC Original Ethernet Dest Addr Src Addr E type Tag Length E type Data New CRC New Tagged Packet Priority CFI VLAN ID M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned 127 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to tra
314. includes the following fields Description Object Frames that hit this QCE are set to match this specific QCL e QCLID A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each QCL ID To include a e Port Members 187 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series port in a QCL member click the radio button Buttons W Click to start the wizard again Back Click to get more information Next Click to continue the wizard Once the QCL configuration wizard is finished the below screen appears Finished The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use Click Finish to get more information Click Wizard Again to start the wizard again Wizard Again Finish Buttons Wizard Again Click to start the wizard again Finish Click to get more information 4 9 2 2 Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control a STEP 1 Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your rule The Set up Typical Network Application Rules screen in Figure 4 9 3 appears 188 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your rule o Aud
315. ing Ethernet Port Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears for Switch 1 Power Over Ethernet Configuration System PoE Admin Mode Power Management Mode Power Supply Budget W Temperature Threshold PoE Usage Threshold Se Re Figure 4 16 2 PoE Configuration screenshot H 318 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e System PoE Admin Allows user enable or disable PoE function It will causes all of PoE ports supply Mode or not supply power e Power Management There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and Mode when to shut down ports Classification mode Allocation mode Consumption mode Priority mode The default POE management mode is Consumption mode e Power Supply Budget Set limit value of the total PoE port provided power to the PDs W For SGSW 24040P the available max value is 220 for SGSW 24040P4 the available max value is 380 and for S SW 24040HP the available max value is 360 e Temperature Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value It system Threshold temperature was over it then system lower total POE power budget automatically e PoE Usage Threshold Allows setting how much PoE power budget could be limited Buttons Save Clic
316. ing in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI Buttons Save e Privilege Level Click to save changes Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 75 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 6 NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this page NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 8 appears NTP Configuration Mode Disable y GMT 0 Casablanca Monrovia Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London v polnpog OO europe pool ntp org north america pool ntp org asia pool ntp org oceania pool ntp org Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When enabling NTP mode operation the agent would forward and transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable NTP mode operation
317. ing picture for sample connection SIXTY SIXTY Figure 2 22 Ring Stack topology 52 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 2 3 1 Connecting Stacking Cable Before attempting to connect stacking ports verify that you have the required stack cables The following cables are used to connect stacked switches e CB STX50 50cm Short stack cable used to connect adjacent SGSW switches e CB STX200 200cm Long Redundant stack cable used to connect the top and bottom SGSW switches of a stack There are two high performance HDMI like Stack ports on the rear panel for proprietary management stack Only the attached PLANET CB STX50 and CB STX200 cross over HDMI cable can be used STEP 1 Plug one end of the cable in the STX1 Cascade Down port and the other end to the STX2 Cascade UP port of next device STEP 2 Repeat the step for every device in the stack cluster and then ending at last switch SIX1V SIX24 E 24 aS Cascade Down ay Figure 2 23 Stacking connection STEP 3 If you wish to implement stack redundancy use the long stack cable CB STX200 to connect the stack port marked STX1 Cascade Down on the bottom switch to the port marked STX2 Cascade Up on the top switch of the stack The stack port is for management and data packets to be transm
318. int and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items m Ping m IPv6 Ping m Cable Diagnostic PING The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follow m Ifthe link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m If the link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available m Coupling between cable pairs m Cable pair termination m Cable Length Buttons Start Click to start to transmit ICMP packets 310 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 15 1 Ping This page
319. io and Video O QuickTime 4 Serer LIMSN Messenger Phone Ll Yahoo Messenger Phone Cl Napster Real Audio o Games O Blizzard Battlenet Diablo2 and StarCraft CJ Fighter Ace Il Cl Quake2 Cl Quake3 LIMSN Game Zone o User Definition Cl Ethernet Type VLAN ID TCP UDP Pot CIDSCP Cancel Wizard Figure 4 9 3 Set up Typical Network Application Rules page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Audio and Video Indicates the common servers that apply to the specific ACE The common servers are QuickTime 4 Server MSN Messenger Phone Yahoo Messenger Phone Napster Real Audio e Games Indicates the common games that apply to the specific QCE e User Definition Indicates the user definition that applies to the specific ACE The user definitions are Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this QCE The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF VLAN ID VLAN ID filter for this QCE The allowed range is 1 to 4095 UDP TCP Port Specify the TCP UDP port filter for this QCE The allowed range is 0 to 65535 DSCP Specify the DSCP filter for this QCE The allowed range is O to 63 Buttons Cancel Wizard Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step Next Click to continue the wizard 189 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series E STEP 2 According to your selection on the previous page this wizard will
320. ion This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics m IEEE 802 1X Port based Network Access Control m MAC based Authentication m User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When au
321. ion 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW The chapter introduces the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard and PoE provision of the Managed Switch Section 9 TROUBSHOOTING The chapter explains how to troubleshoot the Managed Switch 23 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch 24 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port E 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 E 4100 1000Base X SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup E 2 High performance 5GbE Stacking interface E 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 with IEEE 802 3af PoE Injector SGSW 24040P 24040P4 E 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 with IEEE 802 3af 802 3at PoE Injector SGSW 24040HP E 4 100 1000Base X SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 M RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup El 2 High performance 5GbE St
322. ion Server Configuration Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security AAA Timeout Description Set or show server timeout Syntax Security AAA Timeout lt timeout gt 454 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt timeout gt Server response timeout 3 3600 seconds default Show server timeout configuration Default Setting 15 Example Set 30sec for server timeout SWITCH gt security aaa timeout 30 Security AAA Deadtime Description Set or show server dead time Syntax Security AAA Deadtime lt dead_time gt Parameters lt dead_time gt Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn t answer a request 0 3600 seconds default Show server dead time configuration Default Setting 300 Example Set 1000sec for server dead time SWITCH gt security aaa deadtime 1000 Security AAA RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt 455 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters The server index 1
323. ion program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components User Priority VLAN User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard
324. ique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment wher
325. irect Users ation Authority E Cluster Administrator er My Cor gt Component Services a Computer Management gt Control 4 Configure Your Server Wizard zs Pas Data Sources ODBC Hd Adminis e Distributed File System mo gt a Printers DNS 6 Domain Controller Security Policy Y Help an fil Domain Security Policy f Event Viewer gt aa Internet Authentication Service Windows Catalog G Internet Information Services 115 Manager Y Windows Update 2 Licensing gt Manage Your Server gt Se Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration En Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards A Network Load Balancing Manager FE Performance gt a Remote Desktops gt a Routing and Remote Access gt By Services B Terminal Server Licensing Log Terminal Services Configuration start 3 8 O SP Terminal Services Manager id Computers Administrator i Windows Explorer Y Paint e HyperTerminal Ethereal an Accessories Internet Explor E Startup 8 Internet Explorer S Outlook Express r Remote Assistance fa Administrative Tools I IxChariot Ethereal All Programs we wh 9 13PM Figure 4 11 15 Windows 2003 AD server setting path 260 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 5 Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to
326. irst by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears MAC Address Table for Switch 1 Start from WLAN 1 and MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Query by LD interface U_ y L VLAN CI MAC Address mac portmem Type VLAN MAC Address cruf1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Static 00 30 4F 76 27 10 Static 33 33 FF 76 27 10 Static 33 33 FF 28 00 64 Dynamic 40 61 86 04 18 69 y Static FF FF FF FF FF FF Y YY VV VV V V VV VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVY Auto Refresh O Figure 4 13 3 MAC Address Table Status Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displ
327. is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network Wikipedia WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is done 569 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product 24 100 1000 SFP Slots with 8 Shared TP Managed Stackable Switch Model Number SGSW 24240 SGSW 24240R Produced by Manufacturer s Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with
328. ist gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP router port disable Disable IGMP router port default Show IGMP router port mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping function for port1 4 SWITCH gt igmp router 1 4 enable 478 IGMP Flooding Description Set or show the IGMP snooping unregistered flood operation Syntax IGMP Flooding enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP flooding disable Disable IGMP flooding default Show IGMP flood mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP flooding function User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt igmp flooding enable IGMP Groups Description Show IGMP groups Syntax IGMP Groups lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 IGMP Status Description Show IGMP status Syntax IGMP Status lt vid gt 479 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting disable 480 6 11 Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Example SWITCH gt aggr configuration Aggregation Mode Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Aggregation Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id g
329. itch SNMP User Lookup ooooooocccococccononoccnononcnnnono nono nono tnut non n nr nono nn nr non n rre 413 Security Switch SNMP Group Add miccional 414 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete o iii 415 Security Switch SNMP Group LO0kUP oooooccconocccononcccnononcncnono nono noncnnnnno nn rc nano nn nr non n rre errar rare rre 415 Security Switch SNMP View Add ooococonoccccconoccnononcccnononcnnnnnnncnr non cnn nan r rn narran errar 416 Security Switch SNMP View Deletes ioiii naii ea ie iae aad rra 416 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup coooooocccococccononcccnononcnnnnnnncnn non cn canon nr rra n nn rre rene rre 416 Security Switch SNMP Access Add reiii di ica 417 Security Switch SNMP Access Delete oooocccoooccconococccononcnconanncon corn ccnnno cnn ccoo cnn rn n nn rr rr rre rre 418 Security Switch SNMP Access LookUp ancrer ae E N rre rra NE E a 418 Security Network Psec Switch i ccoooioinici iion e n Ea e E iaoi E E 419 Security Network Pse POf eynine eiiiai eiaa pa a ea ea eia aa edian aai eiat a pinas 420 Security Network Limit Configuration ooooccinnnncnnnncccnnnoncnonononnno nono coronan cnn nono nnn rn n rre rr rra 421 Security Network Limit Mode nienean aai 422 Security Network Limit AGING serans iae na EE Ea aea E EE EEEa aE NE EE AAEN oA ERST EEE E AEA na 422 Security Network LimMiItAgetiMe iiig tiie eaaa a a a aeaa aiga aa aidaa Genes de aaea oia Aes 423 Security Network Limit Port a a a Ee ar eea ae Ea Area peana ES Enaid 423
330. itted between other SGSW stackable switches the stack ports can t be configured with Layer 2 features via management interface STEP 4 Power up the stack switches 2 3 2 Management Stacking The stack operation of the SGSW Managed Switch supports Plug and Play Stacking connection and auto stack configuration STEP 5 Once the stack starts operation the Stack master will be automatically elected without any configuration The Stack 53 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series master is indicated by a lit green Master LED on the front panel as the Figure 2 24 shows DPLANET scsw 2s040 E Stack ID Master LED 24040 ee ASA ee ee ee Figure 2 24 Stack Master with Master LED lit STEP 6 When a SGSW Switch is added to the stack a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the SGSW Switch The automatic SID assignment can be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch STEP 7 Connect the RS 232 serial cable to the console port on the front of the stack master then login the SGSW Switch to start the switch management Or you can use the PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to display the IP address of the stack and Web login the stack with this IP address The default IP address of the SGSW Switch is 192 168 0 100 e PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option
331. ity configured by the user e Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status e AT AF Mode Display the current POE mode SGSW 24040HP only e Total Show the total watts usage of all PDs Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 324 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 16 5 PoE Schedule This page allows the user to define PoE schedule The screen in Figure 4 16 5 appears Power Over Ethernet Schedule for Switch 1 Week Day Start Hour Start Min End Hour End Min Reboot Enable Reboot Only Reboot Hour Reboot Min Add New Rule PoE Schedule PoE Reboot 00h Oth 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h OSh 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 20h 21h 22h 23h 00h Figure 4 16 5 PoE Schedule screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Profile Set the schedule profile mode Possible porifles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 e Week Day Show the PoE schedule mode usage of week day e Start Hour Allow choosing specific hour for PoE port enable and feed PoE power e Start Min Allow choosing specific minutes for PoE port enable and feed PoE power e End Hour Allow choosing specific hour for PoE port disable and stop feed PoE power e End Min Allow choosing specific minutes for PoE port disable andn st
332. k on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they 232 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X
333. k to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Ly For SGSW 24040P the total PoE power reservation from Port 1 to 24 is up to 220W gs For SGSW 24040P4 the total PoE power reservation from Port 1 to 24 is up to 3880W n WaS For SGSW 24040HP the total PoE power reservation from Port 1 to 24 is up to 360W PD Classifications APD may be classified by the PSE based on the classification information provided by the PD The intent of PD classification is to provide information about the maximum power required by the PD during operation Class 0 is the default for PDs However to improve power management at the PSE the PD may opt to provide a signature for Class 1 to 4 The PD is classified based on power The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes APD will return to Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power used as specified by Table 4 16 1 319 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Class Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Dsecription MIN Default 0 44 to 12 95 Watts Classification unimplement la Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Watts Very low power _2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Watts o Lowpower EJ Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts or to 15 4 Watts 4 Optional 12 95 to 25 50 Watts or to 30 8 Watts High power Table 4 16 1 Device class Only the SGSW 24040HP
334. ld time is exceeded Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address 296 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 3 LLDPMED Configuration This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED
335. le Enable the Voice VLAN port security mode for port 1 4 SWITCH gt voice vian security 1 4 enable 532 6 23 SMTP Command SMTP Configuration Description Show SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Configuration Default Setting disable SMTP Mode Description Enable or disable SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP mode disable Disable SMTP mode default Show SMTP mode Default Setting disable SMTP Server Description Set or show SMTP server configure Syntax SMTP Server lt server gt lt port gt Parameters 533 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series lt server gt SMTP server address lt port gt SMTP server port Default Setting disable SMTP Auth Description Enable or disable SMTP authentication configure Syntax SMTP Auth enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP Authentication disable Disable SMTP Authentication default Show SMTP Authentication Default Setting disable SMTP Auth_user Description Set or show SMTP authentication user name configure Syntax SMTP Auth_user lt auth_user_text gt Parameters lt auth_user_text gt SMTP Authentication User Name Default Setting disable 534 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SMTP Auth_pass Description Set or show SMTP authentication password configure Syntax SMTP Auth_pass lt auth_pa
336. le is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port and has reached a configured maximum number the Managed Switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table The selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch The MAC Table Learning screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears 288 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series MAC Table Learning for Switch 1 Port Members 71 8 9j10f11J12f13f14f15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Figure 4 13 4 MAC Table Learning screenshot The page includes the foll
337. led unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited 447 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited Disabled unlimited IP Source Guard Entry Table Port VLAN IP Address Security Network IP Source Guard Mode Description Set or show IP source guard mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard disable Disable IP Source Guard Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard mode SWITCH gt security network ip source guard mode enable 448 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IP Source Guard port disable Disable IP Source Guard port default Show IP Source Guard port mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard port mode for port1 4 SWITCH gt security network ip source guard port mode 1 4 enable Security Network IP Source
338. length for this port 110 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Transmit Error Counters Object Description e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Buttons Refiesh Click to refresh the page immediately crear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh rh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 4 4 SFP Module Information You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a specific interface The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4 4 4 appears SFP Module Information for Switch 1 Por woe speed prove nation 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 ae 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1550 70000 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 Auto Refresh Figure 4 4 4 SFP Module Information for Switch page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are M 1000Base SX NW 1000Base LX HM 100Base FX 111 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e
339. liable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagr
340. ll received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet a Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will received the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 en At this example VLAN Group 1 just set as default VLAN but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow Note Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 24 3 Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1 Remember to remove the Port 1 Port 6 from VLAN 1 membership since the Port 1 Port 6 had be assigned to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 143 4 5 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN Membership Configuration for Switch 1 Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page SS Berete van wla 2 3 4 5 6 Le ooo pp Figure 4 6 9 Add new VLAN group assign VLAN members for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3
341. llocation It can limit the port PoE supply watts Per port maximum value must less than 15 4 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value if current PoE mode is 802 3af Per port maximum value must less than 30 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value if current PoE mode is 802 3at Once power overload detected the port will auto shut down 321 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series and keep on detection mode until PD s power consumption lower than the power limit value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values g Only the SGSW 24040HP has IEEE 802 3at mode and supplies a maximum Power of up to Wit 30 8 watts 322 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 16 4 PoE Status This page allows the user to inspect the total power consumption total power reserved and current status for all PoE ports The screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears for Switch 1 Power Over Ethernet Status Current Power Consumption 270 5 360 WW Total Power Reserved 271 6 360 W Temperature 1 33 0 91 F Temperature 2 32 0190 F Eh PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON 0 i PoE Search 0 i PoE Search 11 6 i PoE ON 11 7 i PoE ON il i PoE ON 18 3 i PoE ON 17 5 i PoE ON 18 3 i PoE ON D i PoE Search i PoE Search PoE Search PoE
342. lobally Disabled Reavthenticate Reinitia EK K E E K Globally Disabled Eesutentcate Reinitia wo Globally Disabled Peauthenticate Reinitia 8 ii Globally Disabled Eesunentcate Reinitia N Globally Disabled canthentcate Reinitia ui Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitia N Q Globally Disabled Reauthentcate Reinitia RSIS RSG RRR AB N Es ES Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitia Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration page screenshot 228 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enabled after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port e Reauthentication Determines the period in seconds after which a connect
343. ly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects 562 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and da
344. mber of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and Unassigned transmitted e Rxand Tx Lease The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and Unknown transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and Active transmitted Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately clear Clears the counters for the selected port 278 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 10 appears IP Source Guard Configuration Stack Global Settings Port Mode Configuration for Switch 1 Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients i s lt lt Ea 0 O 10 0M02 UN o ES v 11 v 12 v Unlimited 13 Unlimited w gt A lt lt mn i os Ea LS a ES N ho
345. mended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button You need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 4 Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface 64 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 1 Main Web Page The SGSW Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status Stack Port Link Status SGSW 24040P Welcome to PLANET lt Main Screen SGSW 24040P 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP Management Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email sales planet com tw Copyright 2010 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Help Button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the
346. ming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type video_signaling Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media tagged The device is using tagged frames unragged The device is using untagged frames lt vlan_id gt VLAN id lt I2_priority gt This field may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 lt dscp gt This field shall contain the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 5 This 6 bit field may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 LLDPMED Port Policy Description Set or show LLDP MED port polcies Syntax LLDPMED port policies lt port_list gt lt policy_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete 497 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series LLDPMED Coordinates Description Set or show LLDP MED Location Syntax LLDPMED Coordinates latitude longitudelaltitude
347. n e DNS Proxy Buttons Save Click to save changes When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Renew Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration The screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears IPv6 Configuration O Auto Configuration 192 168 0 100 192 1680 00 Link Local Address fe80 230 4fftfe24 4d1 VLAN ID The page includes the following fields Object Figure 4 2 3 Pv6 Configuration page screenshot Description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records 70 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separa
348. n e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e IP Mask It can be used for calculating the allowed network with IP address Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 281 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 12 ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 12 appears ARP Inspection Configuration Stack Global Settings ode Dest Y Port Mode Configuration for Switch 1 lt lt EIEE 4 SNS NAN SNS KS SNS SNS NN SNE Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration screen page screenshot 282 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of ARP Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection In
349. n an e mail is sent Authentication User Name Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Authentication Password Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable E mail From Type the sender s E mail address This address is used for reply e mails E mail Subject Type the subject title of the e mail E mail 1 To Type the receiver s e mail address E mail 2 To 86 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons est Send a test mail to mail server to check this account is available or not Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 15 Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 18 appears Firmware Upgrade Eo Figure 4 2 18 Web Firmware Upgrade page screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 18 3 Click the tome button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware Upload 4 Select on the firmware then click Usleed the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully The following screen appears The sys
350. n ea e aaae aaaea e e AE a EANA E E Eea 175 4 8 3 IGMP Port Related Configuration oonnociccinnnnnnnnccccnononnnononannnnnnrn cn nano nn rr nnnn nn ran nr 176 4 8 4 VEAN OOM OUA O a a a a odos 177 4 8 5 Port Group Filtering aiig ea iia ibi 178 4 8 6 GMP SNOOping Status ETET state sdecdceccnsscncevdsd snspespnecdetsactedensuraacopeieddsseceecduiesasedccacnasntesdaneeevs 179 4 3 7 MVR Configuration c is 181 48 MVR SUS e ee al E ds el 183 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 9 Quality Of Service iii A pa liada 185 4 91 Understand QOS ii oc 185 4 9 2 OCL Configuration Wizard iaa oda 186 AZ ISO up Policy Rules AAA 187 4 9 2 2 Set up Typical Network Application Rules ooooooccconnccccnnnocanonononnnononcncnnno cnn r nono cnn nar r rn naar rn rn rn rr nnnn rra 188 4 9 2 3 Setup ToS Precedence Mapping cuicocooiicacinii di 190 4 9 2 4 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping ooocccnnonccnnoconanononononanoncnn nono cnn nan nn c nano nn rn knnt EEEn r rra rnr rra 192 4 9 3 005 Control List Configuration rca ai 193 4 9 3 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration oooocccnnnoniconnnoccnnnoncncnanonnnnnnannnnn non nc nano nn ran n rra 194 4 9 4 Port QoS ComfiQguration sinsir ann naaa oun eces bocu sess a Ea A EE ea AE L AEAEE ETR EAA A E ASERRE E A Taa na 195 4 9 5 Bandwidth Control occiso ii i a 197 4 9 6 Storm Control Configuration oononcccnnnoncccnonocnnonononcnnnononcnnno nn nrnnnn cnn narran rra rre rn rre n rana r rr r
351. n shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port a Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled Dynamic Link up power savings enabled Enabled Link up and link down power savings enabled When setting each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes the Auto MDIX function will disable 107 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Port Statistics Overview for Switch 1 packets we eos Drops r 0 0 0 jo leo a lol jo hls ko 09 IN 0 Un 4 00 Iho oo wo oD ooowocqcococococooococooceoococececeo 10 1 1 13 14 1 16 17 1 19 20 21 22 23 24 a iS ooomoooocoocoecoeoccecccccc cc c 0o ooomooccoccoecceccocccccdcccccc cco eo ocofooocoococoocooco no p ob oeocnoso 000000000000 00000000000o00o0o0o 0000000000000 00000000o0o0osNO
352. na 444 Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode cooocccccoccccconoccncnononcnonono conan cnn n nono nnn ran cnn nano rr rra rra rre 445 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode oooocconnoccccconoccnononcconononcnn nono ncnnnonn nc nano nn rr naar rre 445 Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics ooooonnnnccnnnnnncnnoccccnnnoncnononannnn nono ncnn no nr rr nano rn rn nr rra 446 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration oooooccccinnninnnoncccnononcncnonancnnnnnnncnn no nr rr nana cnn nn nn 447 Security Network IP Source Guard Mode criin i A iiaea 448 Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode oococcconoccccnococcnononcncnononcncnnno cnn nan n nn nano n rr cnn rn 449 Security Network IP Source Guard Limit 0 0 eee inae aaia ia id adada iea ieni Aae 449 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry c ccooocccncocccccononcncnononcnonono conan tunk nono cnn ran n nn naar nr rra rare 450 Security Network IP Source Guard Status ee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesenaeesenenaees 450 Security Network ARP Inspection Configurati0N oooononcccnnnnnconococcnnnonnncnonancnn nono nnnn no nr rr naar rn r anna rr rr 451 Security Network ARP Inspection Mode oocooocccinocccccononcncnononcnonono nono nono nc nono cnn ran nr 451 Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode cccccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeaaeceeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 452 13 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240
353. nabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also know as Root Guard e Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning trees active topology as a result of persistent incorrectly learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or is the physical link state for the attached LANs transitions frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as
354. nd of user modules and the other with the actual port status The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4 12 6 appears 272 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Port Security Status Auto Refresh C User Module Legend User Module Name Abbr Limit Control 802 1X DHCP Snooping Voice VLAN Port Status for Switch 1 MAC Count Port Users State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fl 8 3 10 11 112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ho Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services Object Description e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table 273 Port Status User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e
355. nds later and the System Reboot screen in Figure 4 2 27 appears System Reboot Are you sure to perform a System Reboot Figure 4 2 27 System Reboot page screenshot Buttons Yes Click to reboot the system No Click to return to the Port State page without rebooting the system You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to see whether the System has been loaded completely or not If the SYS LED is blinking then it is in the loading stage if the SYS LED light is on you can use the WEB browser to login the Switch 93 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapix
356. ng Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 8 appears IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration for Switch 1 Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Buttons Delete Check to delete the entry Add new Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 6 IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status The status relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 9 appears 179 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IGMP Snooping Status for Switch 1 Auto Refresh O Statistics LAN ID Querier Status Y1 Reports Receive Y2 Reports Receive 3 Reports Receive 2 Leave Receive IGMP Groups Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt 8 o 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 No IGMP Router Port Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e G
357. ng fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e STP Enabled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port 160 e Path Cost User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transitioning to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports e AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not e Restricted Role If e
358. ng state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets a Forwarding the port is forwarding packets a Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking E From blocking to listening or to disabled a From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled E From forwarding to disabled E From disabled to blocking 151 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Switch Blocking Listening Disable Learning Forwarding Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or
359. nge privilege level of MVR group SWITCH gt security switch privilege level group mvr 15 15 15 15 Security Switch Privilege Level Current Description Show the current privilege level Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Current Default Setting 15 Security Switch Auth Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security Switch Auth Configuration Default Setting Authentication Method local Fallback disable Example Show authentication configuration SWITCH gt security switch auth configuration Auth Configuration Authentication Method Local Authentication Fallback Disabled 391 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series telnet local Disabled ssh local Disabled web local Disabled Security Switch Auth Method Description Set or show Auth method Syntax Security Switch Auth Method console telnet ssh web none local radius tacacs enable disable Parameters console Settings for console telnet Settings for telnet ssh Settings for ssh web Settings for web none Authentication disabled local Use local authentication radius Use remote RADIUS authentication tacacs Use remote TACACS authentication default Show client authentication method enable Enable local authentication if remote authentication fails disable Disable local authentication if remote authentication fails default Show backup client authentication configur
360. nk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk 162 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 4 7 5 MSTI Priorities This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4 7 10 appears MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration 32768 Y 32768 v 32768 v 32768 32768 32768 32768 Y 32768 Y Figure 4 7 10 MSTI Priority page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears 163 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification
361. nk Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears 293 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters anal ona LLDP Port Configuration for Switch 1 Optional TLYs Port Mode CDP aware Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities M
362. nning Tree 156 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The STP Bridge Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 7 appears STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings E Version MSTP Forward a 15 Max ae T Maximum Maximum Hop Count Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering LOA Port BPDU Guard Port Error Port Error Recovery _ Figure 4 7 7 STP Bridge Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Basic Settings Object Description e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 200 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 e Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops 157 e Transmit Hold Count User s
363. noccccnnnonnncnonannnnnorn tnnt non r rr narran rre 433 Security Network ACL Configuration oooooccccnnnncnnoccccnononnncnonancnn nono unuttu tutt nn nn rra ran n rre 434 Security Network ACL ACON vicio iia iia 435 Security Network ACL PoliCY oroironipis ca ll ams 436 security Network AGk Rate ei a a tt ta 437 Security Network ACL Add iii eenletsscduseleeedadieeoucldieestneeteedzeees 437 Security Network AGL Delete ias 439 security Network ACL Lo0kUP clica tie dada 439 Security Network ACL Clean oooooccnnncccnnnoccccnonocnnononoconono conc nono cnn rn rn nn nn 439 Security Network ACLMatUS iii od iets 440 Security Network DHCP Relay Configurati0N oooooccnnnncccnnnnccnononcccnnnonnncnono cnn o nonn nn nano nr rr narrar rre 440 Security Network DHCP Relay Mode oooooccccococcconocccccononcncnnnnncnononncnnn non n nc nano nn n ran n nr rar rra 441 Security Network DHCP Relay Server ooocccinoccconococccononcnnnnnoncnn nono ncnn no nn nn nana n cnn nn rra 442 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode ooocccccnnocccnnoccccnononcnonono nono non nn nono nn nr nano cnn rn n cnn rre 442 Security Network DHCP Relay Information PoliCY oooooocinnnnnnnnnccnnnnocccnnonacnnnnoncconn noc rr cnn nor cnn rra 443 Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics o ooononccnnnnnniccnnnoccnnnonccnnnnannncnonannnnnnrn cnn iaaiaee iaeia 443 Security Network DHCP Snooping ConfiguratiON ooooccccnnnnnnnnoncccnnnonnnonononnnnnonnnn nano cnn r naar rra r an
364. non PoE ready device while power is still on Imagine disconnecting a powered IP phone utilizing 48 VDC then inadvertently plugging the powered Ethernet cable into a non PoE notebook computer What s sure to follow is not a pretty picture The standard defines two means of disconnection DC Disconnect and AC Disconnect both of which provide the same functionality the PSE shutdowns power to a disconnected port within 300 to 400ms The upper boundary is a physical human limit for disconnecting one PD and reconnecting another 546 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series DC Disconnect DC Disconnect detection involves measurement of current Naturally a disconnected PD stops consuming current which can be inspected by the PSE The PSE must therefore disconnect power within 300 to 400 ms from the current flow stop The lower time boundary is important to prevent shutdown due to random fluctuations AC Disconnect This method is based on the fact that when a valid PD is connected to a port the AC impedance measured on its terminals is significantly lower than in the case of an open port disconnected PD AC Disconnect detection involves the induction of low AC signal in addition to the 48 VDC operating voltage The returned AC signal amplitude is monitored by the PSE at the port terminals During normal operation the PD s relatively low impedance lowers the returned AC signal while a sudden disconnection of this PD will cause a surge
365. nonannnn conc ncnn no ncnn nano rca rar nnn naar rre ran 257 4 11 10 802 1X Client Configuration i i issin A EE 262 PAT AAA AP O 265 4 12 31 Port Limit Comttol cita iia daa 265 4212 2 ACCESS Man iran 269 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics coccion ie 270 AAQ AAT UPS 38 ioe eects nthe E aie ated Mee ein isi ac oath one E hs ped pened aia E 271 AAD SSSA eects gaa thas hte EE E EE E Pecesde reasdl ais Shag E EEA 271 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 6 Port Security Status iii tod iii 272 412 7 Port Security Detail 2 cost ccc is cep ci ice ote eee bee lees inc 275 4 12 8 DACP SNOOPING 2 is52 25 Genes sees ce tee aetes debe bad ast a tica 276 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics i eee ee enneee ee a E E aa aae A EA Or Aa EAR S Ee REAA EEA ESTEER 277 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration iscan a teed biel A E eE 279 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table iniiai nwn r dolida 281 4 1212 ARP INSpECtON kirece ae dada 282 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table izat ereire ee aaaea eaaa a aeii a aa i etea e Ri Enan 283 AIS Address Table a e ea ara e ae aae a oe it 285 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration ooccconnnnnnnoncccnnnoncnononannnononnnnnn non n nr nono nnn rn nn rre 285 4 13 2 Static MAC Table Configuration ooononcccninocinnnoccccnononnncnononcnnnnrn cn nano nr rr reno rn rare 286 4 13 3 MAC Address Table Stats ninenin naa a a a e ea a a ae aaia 287 4 13 4 MAC Table Le amiga a ins 288 4 13 5 Dynamic ARP Inspection
366. ns information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics E Requirements a Management Access Overview a Administration Console Access E Web Management Access a SNMP Access a Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements E Workstations of subscribers running Windows 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP MAC OS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols E Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card E Serial Port connect Terminal e The above PC comes with COM Port DB9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter a Ethernet Port connection e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors a The above workstation is installed with Web browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch 56 3 2 Management Access Overview User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods E An administration console a Web browser interface a An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Meth
367. ns un rack Pour installer quipement dans un rack 19 pouces standard veuillez suivre les instructions suivantes Etape1 Placez l quipement sur une surface dure et plate avec la face avant en regard vers vous Etape2 Fixez les supports pour rack de chaque c t de l quipement avec les vis fournies Figure 2 16 Illustration de la fixation des supports pour rack Figure 2 16 Attach brackets to the Managed Switch Seules les vis fournies avec les supports doivent tre utilis es Tout dommage caus par l utilisation des vis diff rentes invalidera la garantie 47 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Etape3 Bien serrer les vis Etape4 Effectuez les m mes tapes pour le second support situ au c t oppos Etape5 Une fois que les supports sont install s utilisez les vis ad quates pour monter l quipement dans le rack comme montr dans la Figure 2 17 4 0080000 Figure 2 17 Mounting SGSW 24040 in a Rack Etape 6 proc de des tapes 4 et 5 tapes de la session 2 2 1 bureau Installation de connecter le c blage r seau et d alimentation au commutateur g r 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch as shown in Figure 2 18 48
368. nshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Locality Indicates the aggregation group type This field is only valid for stackable switches a Global The group members may reside on different units in the stack The device supports two 8 port global aggregations a Local The group members reside on the same unit Each local aggregation may consist of up to 16 members e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 119 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 5 2 LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack
369. nsmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Ml Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default E Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network de
370. nt IP IP configuration and Ping Port Port management MAC MAC address table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN Security Security management STP Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol snooping Aggr Link Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDPMED Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media PoE Power Over Ethernet QoS Quality of Service Mirror Port mirroring Config Load Save of configuration via TFTP Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP UPnP Universal Plug and Play MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Voice VLAN Specific VLAN for voice traffic SMTP SMTP control configure Show Display the current information 345 6 1 System Command System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax System Configuration all lt port_list gt Parameters User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example To display system information SWITCH gt System configuration System Contact System Name SGSW 24040P System Location Timezone Offset 0 CLI Prompt SWITCH MAC Address 00 30 4f 76 27 10 Power Status AC Power Temperature 49 5 C 121 1 F System Time 1970 01 01 Thu 00 08 08 0000 System Uptime 00 08 08 Software Version 1 5b100623 Software Date 2010 06 23 15 43
371. nter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Object Description e SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears e SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears e DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination VLAN Parameters Object MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description e VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this
372. nual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The PoE Provision PrO O SSi a a sch Su sk ane nc scot acim aa a a aiar eaa a aaea Ka aao aaia nienia 545 Stages of powering up a POE link iise aa ea ea aA a a ARAE Aa AAE E EEE A aAa TERE RAEE EEE RAES 545 EEDE Eteo A PEEP E EEE A EE Got E E A eds 545 GIASSITICATION EAEE EEA EEE EA A AA E E ET EEA E A E EAE E AEE 546 StartUp aa A ns eek es eevee er es E ee ieee etek 546 Operatlony chcs dened Sate heii ted wii bavi eee ae Renan Bendis dl wi ba Sach Aint 546 Power Disconnection Scenarios cceeececcceccceenessececececeeassceeeceseaueaseceeeeecaaeeseeeeeseaueaseeeeeeeseaueaseeceeeeaeaueneseeeeeeaeaaeness 546 9 TROUBLESHOOTING iia iia nnna 548 APPENDDO SEE EE E E A edad 550 A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments ssssssssseunsuunsuunnuunnunnnunnnunnnunnnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennn nnnn nnne nnan 550 A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX cui dica 550 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY isaac aiii a 552 19 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 1 INTRODUTION PLANET Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch series SGSW Stackable SGSW PoE and SGSW Fiber Switches is all multiple port Gigabit Ethernet Switch with SFP fiber optic connective ability and robust layer 2 features the description of these models is shown below SGSW 24040 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Port Shared SFP Managed Stackable Switch SGSW 24040R f 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Port Shared SFP Managed Stackable Switch
373. o The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agent s MAC address The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 11 appears DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Relay Server Relay Information Mode Relay Information Policy Ge ra Figure 4 2 11 DHCP Relay Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes Mode are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode
374. o le J lt co A _ wo lt Nh Sl la MN lt bh ho ls EN O te O i O PE O ho N E Rin lt lt Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 e Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit e Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply to this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 15 The default value is Disabled e Port Copy Select which port frames are copied to The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled 219 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate are limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port
375. o a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware 3 The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items a IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Enable IEEE 802 1Q Tag based VLAN group a IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Enables 802 1Q QinQ Tunneling a Private VLAN Creates removes primary or community VLANs 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers ar
376. o eet sd te Nees E Ar o e Ad eh E E 468 STP Port RestrictedRole i032 asec seinen ace 469 STP Ports Restricted iuris ias oia 469 STP Pom DPAU GUA Arctica lts ads dit 470 STP Pom Statistic a da 470 STP Port MONG CK iesean e saben cease tad vee dee cylin te i e sec esse eeks 471 STP MSTI Port COnMQUratiOn ere ci 471 STP MSTIPort Cost ias eos o ros e el al ato a dd a As 472 STP MSTIPort Pridrity a 473 6 10 Multicast Configuration Command cccstceeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeessenaaeeneeeeeeeeeseaesaseeeeneeeeseaeseseaeeneeeees 474 IGMP Comf OU A ON co Ada 474 14 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IGMP Mode cui iii 474 IGMP L ave Prony ii ir 475 IG MIPS tate settee aa tas tick ac le NS te rs hs oe 6h oR e Gh NS nH eon BNL ne ast Ga 475 IGMP QUEMIER E E A E AR Ie a 476 IGMP FastleavVe stats otra ei si ee ee ee ee ac 476 IGMP Throttling css5 85 002 as te od tn Aiea aes eA ee ee eh el in al eee e e 477 IGMP FINEN es acces pee eeaeee assert ee See ath dd dde iio enacts 477 IEMP Router coi A A A 478 IGMP Flooding eieiei aa 479 IGMP GroupS E E E E EE E T E E A E E E E A 479 IGMP Status tosco a a a a do dd 479 6 11 Link Aggregation Command commmmciccccnnncnnncnnnrr rr 481 Aggregation Conf JUAN O a eccceceenneeeceeeceeeeneeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeesaeeesesaaeeeseneeeeesneeeeeenaeeseneeeeeseneeeenaes 481 Aggregation Addes nacinane ee ine ane Ln ee ein ie aie 481 Aggregation Delete ciao AA bed a A a a ieai
377. o one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 16 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 12 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed ina standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e
378. o switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Disable Automatic Aging Age Time Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Disable Automatic Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries Aging e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Buttons
379. oS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification can be controlled by Port QoS configuration page And this page is used to configure DSCP remarking The DSCP value of incoming frames will be changed according to its mapping queue once this packet is transmitted by the egress port The DSCP Remarking Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 13 appears 201 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series DSCP Remarking Configuration for Switch 1 DSCP Queue Mapping DSCP Remarking Mode tow noma medum CS2 Low Disable v CSl CS3 CS4 EOS cs Disable v CSI CS3 Disable v CSI CS3 Disable v CSI C83 C83 Disable v Cl CS3 CS3 Disable v CS1 53 Disable v CS1 053 aa i 2 ca CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 Q lt lt Q lt EIEI lt Q FRIRE 2 E Aa aaa ae ES 2 2 oon ont Won Disable v CS1 Disable v Ci s Q EIN Disable v CS1 j Disable v Cl Z Z EJE Q lt lt Q EIEEE SNS SS SS Disable v CSl Disable v Cl Disable v Cl Disable v CS Disable v CS Disable v Si Disable v Cs1 j Disable v CSl Disable v Cl Disable v Cl Disable v CSi Figure 4 9 13 DSCP Remarking Configuration page screenshot 8 2 2 8 8 2 g 2 o Sp E ES Es 7 la g 2
380. obal O 3600 seconds seconds seconds lo seconds Port Configuration for Switch 1 pon cen E bt ua eme never Force Authorized Force Authorizad v Globally Disabled Feavthentica Reinitial Force Authorizal v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitial Force Authorized Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitia Force Authorized v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitial Fore Authorized Globally Disabled Reauthentcate Reinitia Force Authorized v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitial For Authorized v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitial Force Authorized v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitia Force Authorized v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitial Force Authoriaad v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitializ Force Authorized v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize Force Authoriaad v Globally Disabled Feauthentic Reinitialize Fore Authorized v Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitial Force Authorized Force Authorized v Force Authorized Force Authorized v Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized v Force Authorized 0 0 nvr ook UN EISI EIEI SI EIEE E E MEN PEE a w N 0 Globally Disabled Reavthenticate Reinitial a Globally Disabled Reauthentcate Reinitial a o Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitial G
381. obally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Overview page screenshot Description e Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new 238 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series client for MAC based authentication e Last ID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more ab
382. occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop pot
383. od Console Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe t
384. ode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode 522 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Default Setting disable Example Enable MVR mode SWITCH gt mvr mode enable MVR Port Mode Description Set or show the MVR port mode Syntax MVR Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the MVR port mode for port 1 4 SWITCH gt mvr port mode 1 4 enable MVR Multicast VLAN Description Set or show MVR multicast VLAN ID Syntax MVR Multicast VLAN lt vid gt 523 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show current MVR multicast VLAN ID Default Setting 100 Example Set VLAN 1000 for MVR multicast VLAN ID SWITCH gt mvr multicast vlan 1000 MVR Port Type Description Set or show MVR port type Syntax MVR Port Type lt port_list gt source receiver Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports source Enable source mode receiver Disable receiver mode default Show MVR port type Default Setting receive Example Set source type for MVR port type of port 1 SWITCH gt mvr port type 1 source MVR Immediate Lea
385. ol a Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs a End stations can belong to multiple VLANs E Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices E Priority tagging M EEE 802 1Q Standard IEEE 802 10 tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 10 VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header HM 802 10
386. olumn Changing Switch IDs does not result in any interruption of the stack operation Em Removing a Switch From the Stack When a switch is removed from the stack the configuration for the switch is preserved and the switch still appears on the Stack Configuration page If the configuration of the switch is not to be transferred to another switch then the configuration may be deleted by choosing Delete followed by Save m Replacing a Switch If a switch is to be replaced with another switch for example replacing failing hardware the following procedure must be used to assign the configuration of the failing switch to the new hardware 1 Remove the failing switch from the stack For example assume that the failing switch had Switch ID 3 2 Insert the new switch into the stack The new switch is assigned an unused Switch ID 3 To remove the automatic switch ID assignment choose Delete followed by Save The new switch is then shown with Switch ID set to 4 To assign the configuration of Switch ID 3 to the new hardware simply choose 3 in the Switch ID column and click Save 5 The new hardware has now taken over the configuration of the failing hardware 330 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series General Switch ID Assignment Rules When assigning Switch IDs to the devices in the stack you must note the following 1 Switches with assigned IDs can be changed to use any other switch ID possibly
387. on Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed ona separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an inten
388. onal classification stages are completed the PSE must switch from low voltage to its full voltage capacity 44 57 Volts over a minimal amount of time above 15 microseconds A gradual startup is required as a sudden rise in voltage reaching high frequencies would introduce noise on the data lines Once provision of power is initiated it is common for inrush current to be experienced at the PSE port due to the PD s input capacitance APD must be designed to cease inrush current consumption of over 350 mA within 50 ms of power provision startup Operation During normal operation the PSE provides 44 57 VDC able to support a minimum of 15 4 watts power Power Overloads The IEEE 802 3af standard defines handling of overload conditions In the event of an overload a PD drawing a higher power level than the allowed 12 95 Watts or an outright short circuit caused by a failure in cabling or in the PD the PSE must shut down power within 50 to 75 milliseconds while limiting current drain during this period to protect the cabling infrastructure Immediate voltage drop is avoided to prevent shutdown due to random fluctuations Power Disconnection Scenarios The IEEE 802 3af standard requires that devices powered over Ethernet be disconnected safely i e power needs be shut down within a short period of time following disconnection of a PD from an active port When a PD is disconnected there is a danger that it will be replaced by a
389. ong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items a System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page a System Information The system information is provided here a Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page 94 a SNMPv3 Communities SNMPv3 Users E SNMPv3 Groups E SNMPv3 Views E SNMPv3 Accesses User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears Read Community Write Community SNMP System Configuration Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation e Version Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 e Read Community Indicates the community re
390. onnected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 343 5 2 Telnet Login User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for user name and password Telnet 192 168 0 101 Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers tote te te I I 4 A A 4 Username admin Password eno 119112114116 i11i13i15 i A Login in progress SWITCH gt 4 118 128122 i243 Se ee ee 117119121123 4 A 344 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System settings and reset options Stack Stack manageme
391. ontrol inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 10 1 Access Control List Status This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears ACL Status for Switch 1 Combined y Auto refresh O Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy CPU Once Conflict No entries Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames 207 Us
392. ood for security considered disable Disable DHCP relaly mode default Show flow DHCP relaly mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay mode SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay mode enable 441 Security Network DHCP Relay Server Description Show or set DHCP relay server Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting null Example Set DHCP relay server in 192 168 0 20 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay server 192 168 0 20 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode Description Set or show DHCP relay agent information option mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remote it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode disable Disable DHCP relay agent information option mode default Show DHCP relay agent information option mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode 442 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt secu
393. op feed PoE power e Reboot Enable Allow enabling or disable Reboot Enable function this function provides choose specific hour minutes for Switch reboot e Reboot Only Allow choosing specific hour minutes for Switch reboot this function enable will disable the start hour min and end hour min function e Reboot Hour Allow choosing specific hour for Switch reboot 325 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Reboot Min Allow choosing specific minutes for Switch reboot Buttons Save Click to save changes Delete Check to delete the entry Add new Rule click to add new rule 4 16 6 LLDP Neighbor Power Over Ethernet This page provides a status overview for all LLDP PoE neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP PoE neighbor is detected The columns hold the following information The screen in Figure 4 16 6 appears LLDP Neighbor Power Over Ethernet Information for Switch 1 Auto refresh C Local Port Power Type Power Priority Figure 4 16 6 LLDP Neighbor Power Over Ethernet screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port The port for this switch on which the LLDP frame was received e Type The Type represents whether the device is a Power Sourcing Entity PSE or Power Device PD If the Type is unknown it is represented as Resevered e Source The Source represents the power
394. or all default All ports enable Enables PoE disable Disable PoE default Show PoE s mode af PoE to af mode at PoE to at mode default Show PoE s af at mode Default Setting enable Example Disable PoE function of port1 4 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt poe mode1 4 disable POE Priority Description Show Set PoE Priority 501 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax PoE Priority lt port_list gt low high critical Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports low Set priority to low high Set priority to high critival Set priority to critical default Show PoE priority Default Setting high Example Set low priority for port21 24 SWITCH gt poe priority 21 24 low PoE Mamagement Mode Description Show Set PoE management mode Syntax PoE Mgmt_mode mgt_class mgt_alloc mgt_consumption mgt_priority Parameters mgt_class handle power allocation according to PD class mgt_alloc power allocated according to values entered in power allocate mgt_consumption allocated according to PD actual need with a maximum of 15 4 W per port mgt_priority max port power determined by priority default Show PoE power management mode Default Setting consumption mode Example Set priority mode for PoE function SWITCH gt poe mgmt_mode mat_priority 502 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 S
395. or South of the equator e Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian e Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a 298 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance e Map Datum Civic Address Location The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwi
396. or each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neighbor Information for Switch 1 No LLDP MED neighbor information found Auto Refresh O Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 303 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to
397. orts enable Enable port isolation 386 disable Disable port isolation default Show port isolation port list Default Setting Promiscous Example Enable isolate for port10 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt pvlan isolate 10 enable 387 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 8 Security Command Security Switch User Configuration Description Show users configuration Syntax Security Switch Users Configuration Default Setting User Name Privilege admin 15 guest 5 Example Enable isolate for port10 SWITCH gt security switch user configuration Users Configuration Security Switch User Add Description Add or modify users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to lt password gt The password for this user name Use clear or as null string lt privilege_level gt User privilege level 1 15 388 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Add new user username test password test amp privilege 10 SWITCH gt security switch users add test test 10 Security Switch User Delete Description Delete users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Delete lt user_name gt Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the us
398. ot cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 237 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 11 4 Network Access Overview This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4 11 5 appears Network Access Overview for Switch 1 Auto refresh O Admin State Port State Last ID QoS Class Port YLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z 8 3 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 i 8 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 The page includes the following fields Object Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Gl
399. out RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears Network Access Statistics for Switch 1 Port 1 Auto refresh LI Port 1 Refresh Port State Admin State Force Authorized Port State Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Port State Object Description e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values 239 e Port State User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned e Port VLAN ID Port Counters Object The VLAN ID th
400. ow current limit Default Setting 4 Example Set limit in 5 SWITCH gt security network limit limit 1 24 5 424 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Network Limit Action Description Set or show the action involved with exceeding the limit Syntax Security Network Limit Action lt port_list gt none trap shut trap_shut Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none trap shut trap_shut Action to be taken in case the number of MAC addresses exceeds the limit none Don t do anything trap Send an SNMP trap shut Shutdown the port trap_shut Send an SNMP trap and shutdown the port default Show current action Default Setting none Example Set trap mode for limit action for port 1 SWITCH gt security network limit action 1 trap Security Network Limit Reopen Description Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down Syntax Security Network Limit Reopen lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Reopen port 1 SWITCH gt security network limit reopen 1 425 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Network NAS Configuration Description Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Security Network NAS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show 802 1X
401. owing fields Object Description e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before BA changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 289 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 13 5 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 13 5 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Table for Switch 1 Start from Port vw VLAN 1 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP Address 0 0 00 with 20 entries per page Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address no more entries Auto Refresh C Refresh ke gt gt Figure 4 13 5 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the Dynamic AR
402. p Figure 4 11 11 Windows Server add new RADIUS client setting 3 Assign the client IP address to the Managed switch New RADIUS Client Name and ddress Type a friendly name and either an IP Address or DNS name for the client Friendly name 202 1 x Managed Switch Client address IP or DNS f 92 168 0 100 Verify lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 12 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting 258 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Managed Switch New RADIUS Client RADIUS Standard ha Figure 4 11 13 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting 259 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 5 Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest Admin State QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled LAN Enabled Port State 1 Porthesed 802 1 w O O O 2 Portbased 802 1X vw O O O Globally Disabled Fesuthenticate Globally Disabled authenticate Reinitializ Figure 4 11 14 802 1x Port Configuration 6 Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server and then e gt a5 Shortcut to Network Security sE Active Directory Domains and Trusts Configurati ig Active Directory Sites and Services D
403. page Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This page provides an overview of the privilege levels Configure NTP on this page Configure UPnP on this page Configure DHCP Relay on this page This page provides statistics for DHCP relay This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The switch system log information is provided here The switch system detailed log information is provided here Configure remote syslog on this page Configure SMTP on this page This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server You can save the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags You can load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained You can restart the stack switch on this page After restarting it the stack switch will boot normally 67 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system up
404. page The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 4 appears HTTPS Configuration a Diao y Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 5 SSH Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module
405. pecific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears e ICMP Code Value TCP UDP Parameters Object When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description e TCP UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE 216 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value TCP UDP D
406. ped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server Authentication Client ki pee pen 802 1X Switch v D 3 EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request or EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge Se EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request oO EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Se Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP message exchange 225 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series E Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traf
407. pol_seen gt parameters will not be unused Syntax Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable lt vid gt lt reauth_max gt lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt Parameters global Select the global Guest VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port Guest VLAN setting default Show current per port Guest VLAN enabledness enable disable enable Enable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current Guest VLAN enabledness lt vid gt Guest VLAN ID used when entering the Guest VLAN Use the global keyword to change it default Show current Guest VLAN ID lt reauth_max gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command The number of times a Request Identity EAPOL frame is sent without reasponse before considering entering the Guest VLAN default Show current Maximum Reauth Count value lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command disable The Guest VLAN can only be entered if no EAPOL frames have been received on a port for the lifetime of the port enable The Guest VLAN can be entered even if an EAPOL frame has been received during the lifetime of the port default Show current setting Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS guest VLAN SWITCH gt security net
408. port bpduguard 1 enable STP Port Statistic Description Show STP port statistics Syntax STP Port Statistics lt port_list gt 470 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show STP port statistics SWITCH gt stp port statistics Port Rx MSTP Tx MSTP Rx RSTP Tx RSTP Rx STP Tx STP Rx TCN Tx TCN Rx Ill Rx Unk 0 0 0 STP Port Mcheck Description Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax STP Port Mcheck lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for port 1 SWITCH gt stp port mcheck 1 STP MSTI Port Configuration Description Show the STP CIST MSTI port configuration Syntax STP Msti Port Configuration lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 471 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Default auto Example Set MSTI2 in port1 2 SWITCH gt stp msti port configuration 2 1 2 MSTI Port Path Cost Priority MST2 Aggr Auto MSTI Port Path Cost Priority Auto Auto STP MSTI Port Cost Description Set or show the STP CIST MSTI port path cost Syntax STP Msti Port Cost lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt path_cost
409. port keyword lt udp_tcp_port gt Source or destination UDP TCP port 0 65535 dscp IP DSCP keyword lt dscp gt IP DSCP 0 63 tos IP ToS keyword lt tos_list gt IP ToS list 0 7 tag_prio VLAN tag priority keyword lt tag_prio_list gt VLAN tag priority list 0 7 lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 508 QoS QCL Lookup Description Lookup QCE Syntax QoS QCL Lookup lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 QoS Mode Description Set or show the port egress scheduler mode Syntax QoS Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show QoS mode Default Setting Strict Example Set weighted mode for port15 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt qos mode 15 weighted QoS Weight Description Set or show the port egress scheduler weight Syntax QoS Weight lt port_list gt lt class gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 lt weight gt Traffic class weight
410. prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each 552 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List w
411. protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons 556 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as
412. r Switch ID Description Switch Type Capable Priority 00 30 4f 24 04 0a 1 v Yes 3 v SGSW 24040R PLANET SGSW 24040R Managed Switch O 00 30 4f 76 27 10 2 M Yes 3 SGSW 24040P PLANET SGSW 24040P Managed Switch O Start Master Election Figure 4 17 6 Stack Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Deletes this switch from the stack configuration e Stack Member The MAC address of the switch e Switch ID The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a switch For more information see description of Switch IDs Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs When a switch is added to the stack a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch The automatic SID assignment can be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch The Switch IDs of two switches can be swapped by simply interchanging the values in the Switch ID column Changing Switch IDs does not result in any interruption of the stack operation Removing a Switch From the Stack When a switch is removed from the stack the configuration for the switch is preserved and the switch still appears on the Stack Configuration page If the configuration of the switch is not to be transferred to another switch then the configuration may be deleted by choosing Delete followed by Save
413. r connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network 551 ACE ACL User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series APPENDIX B GLOSSARY ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a
414. r ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain 554 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circ
415. r on the Tx Access Requests Tx Access Retransmissio ns Tx Pending Requests Tx Timeouts User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout Asend toa different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name Description 253 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series State Shows the state of the server It takes one of the
416. r rnnnn rra 134 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Status for User Static ooooooococcnnnnnicococcccnccoconononnconcnnnnnononccnncnnnnnnnn nn cnn cnn cnn nn nn cnn rn nnnnnnnncnncnn 135 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status for User Static ooooonnnocccnnnicinocccccononnncnononnnononnnnnn ttunttun At cnn rn n rra 136 4 6 8 Port Isolation Configuration iii beeen lv ees suse E E E EA E eee ieee Beaiieyeencuivestioes 138 4 6 9 Private VLAN Membership Configuration oooioncccnnnocccononocnnononcccnononcncnnno cnn nro n cnn nao rn rr ran rra 140 4 6 10 VLAN setting example iii innato 142 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 10 VLAN 2 ceceedecgeceecceceenseeeceenagendesosdeneeseeseduensneeseoneaendacepeecenensadbceensussqeevecendnerseee 142 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware SWitCh oooononccnnnnocicnnoccccnononcnnnnnn conan nn nn nnnon nn ran cnn naar rra 146 4 6 10 3 Port Isolate oo ricas 147 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol iii id 150 ALAMOS DA one a a A a 150 4 7 2 STP Bridge Configurations sc cisc cvcssgeeacsesteecesastesansattpeessuanes rena aaaea i AE Eaa aeaa nA iriaren 156 ALES BO StAtUs o A A A a Me ede tated A ii 158 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration a di 159 4 75 MSTIPronities o o E e e o o ds 163 4 7 6 MST Configura A ici 163 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration aa a e a a rn none 165 4 7 8 PO Sal ii AA ee E eae 168 4 19 Port Statistics iia A A a aia oo 169 4 8 MUA fr 171 4 81 IGMP SMOOPING suero o aa 171 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configuratori a nano nnn nro n cn
417. r text based management it can also be accessed via Telnet and the console port Powerful Security The Managed Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms also consist of port based 802 1x and MAC based user and device authentication The port security is effective in limiting the number of clients passing through so that network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less than before Flexibility and Extension solution The 4 mini GBIC slots are compatible with 1000Base SX LX and WDM SFP Small Factor Pluggable fiber optic modules The distance can be extended from 550 meters Multi Mode fiber up to above 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers Single Mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for using within the enterprise data centers and distributions Reliability Stacking Management The SGSW Managed Switch series provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP address That helps network managers to easily configure switches via one single IP address instead of connecting and setting each unit one by one Through its high bandwidth tunnel and stacking technology it gives enterprises service providers and telecoms flexible control over port density uplinks and switch stack performance Up to 384 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports
418. ra nera 199 ASS nen a hie ete le i ain We ee eee area 200 4 9 3 DSCP ReEMarking iio di 201 4 9 9 Voice VLAN ConfiguratiOn estancas atte aaa any opel 203 4 9 10 Voice VLAN QUIE Table cv 0 a do 206 ATONACCESS CONt OLAS Sii dais 207 4 10 1 Acce ss Control List Status iii ia 207 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration oooocccnnnnnnnnnncccnnnonnnnnonannnn nono taut no tutkun Atk AnA n nn 208 4 10 3 ACE Config ratio Mig e e e ca 210 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration a a r e a e aa a r a er a tices ea Eee AA a Ae rA eA AE Meets cpesduag sastdecernaseestashinets 218 4 10 5ACL Rate Limiter Configuration 1 0 4c eer sie in eee anid e eee eel e 221 AAA Cath ON cses recta aa ates aia ead a 222 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication 0 0 ec eeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeesnaeeeeneeaeees 223 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration ssassn aa iE n A AE aa n EA AE EA EE nE AR NENN aai 226 4 11 3 Network Access Server ConfiguratiON oooonccnnnncccnnnoccccnononnnononccnnnn cnn crono cnn rn nn rn nn rre rre rre 227 4 11 4 Network ACCESS OVerVieW a iaa aeaea faa nono cnn rr Rennes 238 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics 000 ais 239 4 11 6 Authentication Server ConfiguratiON ooccoconicnnoncccnnnoccncnononnnononnccnnno nc nr nono nnn nn nn 246 4 117 RADIUS Oyeme W nitrato add 249 4 41 83 RADIUS Detalls 30 te tee og o ee e ea do e ld e e a 251 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configurati0N oocononccnnnccccnnnoccnc
419. rap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation e Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 e Trap Community Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The 97 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Trap Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address Trap Destination IPv6 Address Provide the trap destination IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Trap Authentication Failure Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Trap Link up and Link down Indicates the SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Pos
420. re SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e RARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e Ethernet E IP Parameters Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must match this
421. resses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X 234 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying th
422. rict Priority a Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y Strict Priority Y E Figure 4 9 9 Port QoS Configuration page screenshot i ARA a Aaaah KB lollo EJIE t AAANAR AN BARR PENS NN IRER a 00 310102 WN Wi KIRK el JEJE SEE h 2 ES o K a J x Elia INEA E IK 7 2 lt lt felelek KERERE a i is A NARA t En 3 2 lt is o i Ss a d KIKK ath bh wo i NN i RIR niala PARRARI o is D NESE BAAR ARAB AARAARAR ARARARA M A Low lt 3 196 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Number of Classes Configure the number of traffic classes as 1 2 or 4 The default value is 4 e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Default Class Configure the
423. ries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed 83 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series gt gt gt Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed a Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 4 2 12 Detailed Log The switch system detailed log information is provided here The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears Detailed System Log Information for Switch 1 JN Message Level Info Time 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 01 0000 Message Switch just made a cold boot Figure 4 2 15 Detailed Log page screenshot The page includs the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Download Download the statistics Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone e Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed La Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID i Print Print out the system log information 84 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 13 Remote Syslog Configure remote s
424. ries expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user 304 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory N DO oO A OO N Reserved e Application Type Applicati
425. rity network dhcp relay information mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy replace keep drop Parameters replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information default Show DHCP relay information policy Default Setting replace Example Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay information policy keep Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP relay statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear DHCP relay statistics 443 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Show DHCP relay statistics SWITCH gt security network dhcp relay statistics Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Description Show DHCP snooping configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Example Set NAS age time in 1
426. rom that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry 291 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Car Flushes all dynamic entries Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 292 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Li
427. roup Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service is based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group 178 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filteri
428. roups The present IGMP groups Max are 128 groups for each VLAN Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE Querier Transmit The number of Transmitted Querier Querier Receive The number of Received Querier V1 Reports Receive The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Receive The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Receive The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leave Receive The number of Received V2 Leave 180 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately clear J Clears all Statistics counters 4 8 7 MVR Configuration In multicast VLAN networks subscribers to a multicast group can exist in more than one VLAN if the VLAN boundary restrictions in a network consist of Layer 2 switches Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The alternative would be to use PIM or a similar protocol to route the traffic through a Layer 3 network it might be necessary to replicate the multicast stream to the same group in different subnets even if they are on the same physical network Multicast VLAN Registration MVR routes packets received in a multicast source VLAN to one or more receive VLANs Clients are in the receive VLAN
429. rror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode Default Setting disable 515 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Enable the mirror mode for port 1 4 SWITCH gt mirror mode 1 4 enable 516 6 18 Configuration Command Configuration Save Description Save configuration to TFTP server Syntax Config Save lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name Configuration Load Description Load configuration from TFTP server Syntax Config Load lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt check Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name check 517 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Check configuration file only default Check and apply file User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 19 Firmware Command Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name
430. rs are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form XX XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC add
431. rsion 2c SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap version 2c Security Switch SNMP Trap Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP traps 404 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP trap community Default Setting public Example Set private value for SNMP trap community SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap community private Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example Set SNMP trap destination address for 192 168 0 20 SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap destination 192 168 0 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination lt ipv6_addr gt 405 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7
432. rts e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest 230 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VL
433. rvals If your browser cannot display anything on this page please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer 82 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 2 11 System Log The switch system log information is provided here The System Log screen in Figure 4 2 14 appears System Log Information for Switch 1 ia The total number of entries is 3 for the given level Start from ID 1 with 20 entries per page Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 01 0000 Switch just made a cold boot Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 04 0000 Link up on switch 1 port 1 Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 04 0000 Link up on switch 1 port 16 Figure 4 2 14 System Log page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Info Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e Time The time of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Auto refresh dl Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone c J Clear all statistics Hide Hide the statistics Download Download the statistics e Updates the system log ent
434. rvals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status for User Static User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment This page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status for User Static screen in Figure 4 6 5 appears VLAN Port Status for User Static Gs Li LAN Aware Ingress Filtering Frame Type Tx Tag uvID ae Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto Refresh O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Static Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_t
435. rved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by e Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh L Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 307 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 14 6 Port Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 5 appears Global Counters Neighbor entries were last changed at 16888 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added D Total Neighbors Entries Deleted D Total Neighbors Entries Dropped D Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 Auto Refresh O LLDP Statistics for Switch 1 Local Counters Local Port Frames Discarded TLYs Discarded TLYs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 1 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 500000000000000000000000 O E O 5 O El O E O Ml O E O El OB Om O E O E O O E O El O 5 O A O fe O E O E O E O E
436. rver Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Buttons Save Click to save change
437. s Authentication Server and the switch Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 248 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 11 7 RADIUS Overview This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Te adres 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview ie adres 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable Auto Refresh O Figure 4 11 8 RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is
438. s Master Forwarding Table As the heading suggests the information in the table is as seen from the master view For each switch in the stack the following information is shown e The MAC address switch ID distance information and the primary forwarding path to the switch e For ring topology a backup path is also provided Master Forwarding Table Stack Member Switch ID DO0 30 4f 24 04 Da USES ESTOS all Auto refresh O Local Local Primary Figure 4 17 9 Stack Information page screenshot Master Forwarding Table 4 17 4 Stack Port State Ovewview This page provides an overview of the current switch port states Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows __ SWITCH ID E Port State Overview Figure 4 17 10 Port State Overview page screenshot 4 17 5 Stack Example Stacking function is convenient for administrator to manage multiple switches by single IP Basically you got to have min 2 units The SGSW Switch supports auto stack configuration Once the stack cable is connect to the stack port of each SGSW switch and power on them the stack is builded automatically and the Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch It is also easy to add or delete stackable switch to the stack without service interruption The key point of the Stack management are 337 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series a Identify the MASTER SWITCH
439. s reduces installation time IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet Pre Standard Compliant SGSW 24040HP only Till today the IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet Standard has become popular yet the PoE demand still grows for increasing network powered applications With many critical applications included the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard may not afford the trend of higher power demand Hence the IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet pre standard is defined to allow delivery of maximum up to 30 watt input power to per PoE device The IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet pre standard is an ideal solution to meeting high power requirements directly via the RJ 45 Port interface Compliant with IEEE 802 3at the SGSW 24040HP possesses stronger power capability than the existing 802 3af PoE Switch The below table lists the major hardware difference between the model series Model 24240 24240R 24040 24040R 24040P 24040P4 24040HP SGSW Series commer e Z Interface 24 100FX compatible 4 100FX compatible 48V DC 48V DC 30V 60V 30V 60V PoE Budget 220W 380W 360W Stack Capability Hardware stacking up to 16 units Redundant Power 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Sect
440. s VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the 236 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Seri
441. s Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 274 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 12 7 Port Security Detail This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it Fora MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4 12 7 appears Port Security Detail for Switch 1 Port 1 Auto Refresh C1 Port No MAC addresses attached Figure 4 12 7 Port Security Detail screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address amp VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses ID are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed e State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC
442. s Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Buttons Ser Click to set MSTx configuration Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 167 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 7 8 Port Status This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 14 appears STP Port Status for Switch 1 Port cist Role cist state Uptime DesignatedPort IEA Od 01 56 44 Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding DesignatedPot Forwarding Od 00 32 05 Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Disabled Discarding Auto Refresh O Fig
443. s fe80 230 4fff fe24 4d1 IPv6 Address 11192 168 0 100 IPv6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router IPv6 VLAN ID 21 Example Set IPv6 address SWITCH gt ip ipv6 setup 2001 0002 64 2100 0001 1 IPv6 Ping Description Ping IPv6 address ICMPv6 echo 360 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 host address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example SWITCH gt ip ipv6 ping 2001 0002 PING6 server 2001 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IP NTP Configuration Description Show NTP configuration Syntax IP NTP Configuration Default Setting IP NTP Configuration
444. s and the multicast server is in the source VLAN Multicast routing has to be disabled when MVR is enabled Refer to the configuration guide at Understanding Multicast VLAN Registration for more information on MVR MVR is typically used for IPTV like services and is therefore usually only available on enterprise level switches Many manufacturers provide support for MVR on their high end switches The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them This page provides MVR related configuration The MVR Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears 181 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series MVR Configuration Stack Global Settings Port Configuration for Switch 1 Port Mode Type Immediate Leave Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Ha i t i lt lt lt lt ii i oon OO amp UN i lt lt SSSI i ji 1 1 i a METETE i AE lt lt i 1 Lie lt i
445. s during the next Save e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members AVLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs 134 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Add new ent Glick to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes y Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values E Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN ID input fields al Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID ag gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Status for User Static This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN
446. s page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch Ml IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame rem
447. s the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members AVLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs Buttons Add new Private WLAN Glick to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 141 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 6 10 VLAN setting example Separate VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Trunk Port Isolate 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLAN The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2
448. sable enable or disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports Default Setting Disable Example Set edge port BPDU guard SWITCH gt stp bpduguard enable STP Recovery Description Set or show edge port error recovery timeout Syntax STP recovery lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Time before error disabled ports are reenabled 30 86400 seconas O disables default Show recovery timeout Default Setting Disable 463 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set STP recovery value in 30 sec SWITCH gt stp recovery 30 STP Status Description Show STP Bridge status Syntax STP Status lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting Disable Example Show STP Bridge status SWITCH gt stp status CIST Bridge STP Status 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Root PathCost 0 Regional Root 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 20 Steady Pri PathCost Edge P2P Uptime DesignatedPort Forwarding 128 20000 Yes Yes 0d 00 10 32 464 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series STP MSTI Priority Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge priority Syntax STP Msti Priority lt msti gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt priority gt ST
449. saved values 175 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 8 3 IGMP Port Related Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Port Related Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 6 appears IGMP Port Related Configuration Port Router Port Fast Leave Throttling _ Y Unlimited Y Unlimited Unlimited o aut Unlimited Y Unlimited Y aut aut auto aut aut 00 50m w N ited Unlimited x Unlimited x Unlimited x ited w w w 0 w b wi wi w w Unlimited Y wi w MM E wi w w wi w 4 o h aut aut b ho bh w mi auto Unlimited Unlimited Unlimi Unlimited Y Unlimited Y Unlimited i Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Y Unlimited h h aut ab nn aut b np aut aut auto y ab wo oo aut aut auto N o ho pla auto static Figure 4 8 6 IGMP Port Related Configuration page screenshot S n e e S e S S a S S S S o a S e e S S a S e The page includes the following fields 176 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Object Description e Router Port Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast dev
450. scription e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 96 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series to 126 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 4 SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears SNMP Trap Configuration Figure 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP t
451. secaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 537 Show I5SMP ConfiguratiOn sico it 537 Show IP Configuration as 537 Show LACP Configuration 0 nace ini eerie ae iene 538 Show LLDP Configuration civic das 538 Show MAC Configuration suas stent a 538 Show Mirror G OnfiQurathon esc Sse zezee a a 538 Show PoE Configuration i ssccceccceesnecocececaessieeededdnesseiudnee itn cenegsdeegueveie aii 538 Show Port Configuration 539 Show Private VLAN ConfiguratiON ooionocicnnnncnic a aaa aeaa ai aa adaa ie aaa e ka aia 539 SHOW QOS Configuration A EP EEEE T AT TETE 539 Show SNMP C nfiguratio Naess A s 539 Show Stack Configurations menr ia Ri 540 Show System ConfiguratiON osreniiracirne trotar Ateo adapte 540 Show VLAN Configuration cata bs 540 Show STP Configuration mestasi adios 540 T SWILGH OPERA O Nino 541 LL Address TA lis 541 A IMING Enen te cenececestuendencsnestce tune te th ceve setesduend eh tavstacetusans E A tvuues suede rcaevertressarsene tenes 541 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering cccceececeseeeeeenseee seen neeeeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeegseaeeeeegseeeeeeaseeneesaseeneeenseenenseseenenes 541 FA StOre aAN F OF WAN A E cecus sdases chtedecads vesues dendereedgsedeessecuustedtsveselestbeesccdeest 541 ANA E A E A A A 542 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW occ c moscconiniccncocnanononcn ncnainc arar n inici irene 543 Mas l EEE E A E E E TA cede cat TT tape suntv ater teucuetees vanetecuoie AT 543 18 User s Ma
452. ser s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 17 Stack Using Stacking it is possible to connect a number of switches together in a stack which behaves as a single switch as seen from outside the stack Two types of stack topologies are supported E Ring topology E Chain topology same as a disconnected ring Multiple PLANET SGSW series devices may be connected together to constitute a ring or chain stack topology using the STX 5Gbps ports as interconnect links Dedicated stacking features built into SGSW series makes all devices in the stack operate together as a single much larger switch Among the stacking features are Hardware controlled stack wide learning and continuous automatic MAC table synchronization a Shortest path forwarding providing low latency and optimal use of stacking link bandwidth a QoS consistency across stack El Single point of management for simple stack administration Low Cost and Flexible HDMI like Stacking cables a Real Plug and Play connectivity The following figure shows an example with five devices in a ring topology stack Each device in the stack is in a stack context called a unit The ports connecting the units are called stack ports and the ports connecting to external hosts and switches are called front ports Chain Stack A chain of switches that is no redundant forwarding paths FS SZ JE EX o i SI J E bn ES e p AZ J G e EX gt E SY JE
453. ser s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Class Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Dsecription MIN Default 0 44 to 12 95 Watts Classification unimplement la Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Watts Very low power _2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Watts NM Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts or to 15 4Watts la Optional 12 95 to 25 50 Watts or to 30 8Watts High power ga In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect Note E Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each port PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields The ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver ga In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more power Note a Consumption mode In this mode the ports are shut down when the actual power consumption for all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or if the actual power consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port The ports are shut down according to the ports priority If two ports have the same priority the port with the highest port number is shut down E Priority mode In this mode the user assign the priority to the ports PD When the total POE power consumption request is over the allowed power supply limitation the system shut down PoE ports by port priority sett
454. serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 58 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 3 4 Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch SGSW Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser AS IP Address o UTP Cable 192 168 0 100 A IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 3 Web management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later SGSW 24040P Welcome to PLANET SGSW 24040P 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP Management Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email sales planet com tw Copyright 2010 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 3 4 Web main screen of Managed Switch 59 60 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Ser
455. set Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 4 Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with a new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears Users Configuration Username Privilige Level admin 15 quest 5 Add new user Figure 4 2 4 Users Configuration page screenshot 71 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Privilege Level The privilgeg level for the user Buttons Add new user Click to add a new user Add Edit User This page configures a user add edit or delete user Add User User Settings Figure 4 2 5 Add Edit User Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username The name identifying the user e Password The password of the user e Privilege Level The privilege level for the user Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users
456. shot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port 169 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Cta Click to clear the information immediately 170 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 8 Multicast 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that
457. should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Click to add a new group entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 102 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 3 5 4 SNMPv3 Views Configuration Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears SNMPv3 Views Configuration View Type OID Subtree DO default_view included Y Asdnew view Seve Reset Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry e OID Sub
458. show the SNMP trap inform mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap inform disable Disable SNMP trap inform default Show SNMP inform mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap inform mode SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap inform mode disable 407 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform timeout usecs Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt SNMP trap inform timeout 0 2147 seconds default Show SNMP trap inform timeout Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap inform timeout in 20sec User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap inform timeout 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform retry times Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times lt retries gt Parameters lt retries gt SNMP trap inform retransmited times 0 255 default Show SNMP trap inform retry times Default Setting 5 Example Set SNMP trap inform retry times in 10 SWITCH gt security switch snmp trap inform retry times 10 408 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID Description Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Syntax Security Swit
459. sible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation Trap Inform Timeout seconds Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Trap Inform Retry Times Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is O to 255 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 98 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 5 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPv3 Communities Configuration private 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Source IP In
460. size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 Example Set 2048 frame size for port1 SWITCH gt port maxframe 1 2048 366 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disable actiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting Enable Example Disable port power function for port1 4 SWITCH gt port power 1 4 disable Port SFP Description Show SFP port information Syntax Port SFP lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 367 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Show SFP information for port21 24 SWITCH gt port sfp Distance m 1000Base LX 1000 Base 10000 1000Base LX 1000 Base 10000 Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions default Show mode Default Setting Discard Example SWITCH gt port excessi
461. spection Configuration e Port Mode Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table This page provides Static ARP Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 13 appears Static ARP Inspection Table for Switch 1 YLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Figure 4 12 13 Static ARP Inspection Table screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets 283 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 284 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 13 Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses t
462. ss_text gt Parameters lt auth_pass_text gt SMTP Authentication Password Default Setting disable SMTP Mailfrom Description Set or show SMTP e mail from configure Syntax SMTP Mailfrom lt mailfrom_text gt Parameters lt mailfrom_text gt SMTP E mail From address Default Setting disable SMTP Mailsubject Description Set or show SMTP e mail subject configure Syntax SMTP Mailsubject lt mailsubject_text gt Parameters lt mailsubject_text gt SMTP E mail Subject 535 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Default Setting disable SMTP Mailto1 Description Set or show SMTP e mail 1 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto1 lt mailto1_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP e mail 1 to address Default Setting disable SMTP Mailto2 Description Set or show SMTP e mail 2 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto2 lt mailto2_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP e mail 2 to address Default Setting disable 536 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 24 Show Command Show ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Show acl Show Link Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Show aggr Show IGMP Configuration Description Show IGMP snooping configuration Syntax Show igmp Show IP Configuration Description Show IP confi
463. st 1 15 default All rate limiters lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting 1 Example Set rate limit value in 1024k for port 1 SWITCH gt security network acl rate 1 1024k Security Network ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch keyword is used the rule applies to all ports If the Port keyword is used the rule applies to the specified port only If the Policy keyword is used the rule applies to all ports configured with the specified policy The default is that the rule applies to all ports Syntax Security Network ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt switch port lt port gt policy lt policy gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt 437 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol g
464. st be ensured that a valid PD is connected to the PSE s output This process is referred to as line detection and involves the PSE seeking a specific 25 KQ signature resistor Detection of this signature indicates that a valid PD is connected and that provision of power to the device may commence The signature resistor lies in the PD s PoE front end isolated from the rest of the the PD s circuitries till detection is certified 545 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Classification Once a PD is detected the PSE may optionally perform classification to determine the maximal power a PD is to consume The PSE induces 15 5 20 5 VDC limited to 100 mA for a period of 10 to 75 ms responded by a certain current consumption by the PD indicating its power class The PD is assigned to one of 5 classes O default class indicates that full 15 4 watts should be provided 1 3 indicate various required power levels and 4 is reserved for future use PDs that do not support classification are assigned to class 0 Special care must be employed in the definition of class thresholds as classification may be affected by cable losses Classifying a PD according to its power consumption may assist a PoE system in optimizing its power distribution Such a system typically suffers from lack of power resources so that efficient power management based on classification results may reduce total system costs Start up Once line detection and opti
465. st gt auto disable secure Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode Default Setting Auto Example Set secure learning mode in port SWITCH gt mac learning 1 secure MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_max gt Maximum number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 373 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Show all of MAC table SWITCH gt mac dump Type VID MAC Address 00 30 00 33 22 55 1 00 30 4f 24 04 d1 None CPU 33 33 ff 24 04 d1 None CPU 33 33 ff a8 00 64 None CPU 40 61 86 04 18 69 10 ff ff ff ff ff ff 1 24 CPU MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statistics Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set all of MAC statistics SWITCH gt mac statistics Port Dynamic Addresses 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 374 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush 375 User s Manual of SGSW 24040
466. st period of time will become master 3 The switch with the smallest master priority 4 The switch with the smallest MAC address The above algorithm ensures that once a master has been elected and has been master for more than 30 seconds it will remain master However in some cases the user may want to enforce a new master election This is done by clicking Start Master Election followed by Save This causes the first two criteria to be ignored thereby basing master election only on master priority and MAC address When master election is enforced the first two criteria are ignored for a period of 10 15 seconds On the Stack State Monitor web page this is shown by Reelect being set to Yes for one of the switches in the stack On the Stack State Monitor web page this is shown by Reelect being set to Yes for one of the switches in the stack Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 335 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 17 3 Stack Information This page provides an overview of the stack topology as detected by SPROUT m 8 Stack Topology The Stack Topology screen in Figure 4 17 7 appears Stack Topology Stack Topology Chain Stack Member Count 2 Last Topology Change 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 17 0000 Master Switch D0 30 4f 24 04 Da Last Master Change 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 01 0000 Figure 4 17 7 Stack Informa
467. string lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware IPv6 Load Description Load new firmware from IPv6 TFTP server Syntax Firmware IPv6 Load lt ipv6_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ipv6_server gt TFTP server IPv6 address 518 6 20 UPnP Command UPnP Configuration Description Show UPnP configuration Syntax UPnP Configuration Example Show UPnP configuration SWITCH gt upnp configuration UPnP Configuration Disabled 4 UPnP Advertising Duration 100 UPnP Mode Description Set or show the UPnP mode Syntax UPnP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable UPnP disable Disable UPnP default Show UPnP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the UPnP mode User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt upnp mode enable 519 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series UPnP TTL Description Set or show the TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages Syntax UPnP TTL sttl gt Parameters lt ttl gt ttl range 1 255 default Show UPnP TTL Default Setting 4 Example Set the value 10 for TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages SWITCH gt upnp ttl 10 UPnP Advertising Duration Description Set or show UPnP Advertising Duration Syntax UPnP Advertising Duration lt duration gt Parameters lt duration gt duration range 100 86400 default Show UPnP duration range
468. t Parameters lt port_list gt Port list lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Default Setting disable Example Add port 1 4 in Group1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt aggr add 1 4 1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Example Delete Group2 SWITCH gt aggr delete 2 Aggregation Lookup Description Lookup link aggregation Syntax Aggr Lookup lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Example Show aggregation status SWITCH gt aggr lookup 1 Aggr ID Name Type 1 GLAG1 Static 482 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Aggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmac lip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac _ Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled IP Enabled Port Enabled Example Disable SMAC mode SWITCH gt Aggr mode smac disable 483 User s Manual of SGSW 240
469. t lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt ip_flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 128 default Next available ID lt ace_id_next gt Next ACE ID 1 128 default Add ACE last switch Switch ACE keyword port Port ACE keyword lt port gt Port number policy Policy ACE keyword lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any lt dmac_type gt DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type or any lt smac gt Source MAC address xx xx XX XX XX Xx or any lt dmac gt Destination MAC address xx xx Xx xX Xx Xx or any arp ARP keyword lt sip gt Source IP address a b c d n or any lt dip gt Destination IP address a b c d n or any lt arp_opcode gt ARP operation code anylarp rarp other lt arp_flags gt ARP flags request smac tmac len ip ether 0 1 any ip IP keyword lt protocol gt IP protocol number 0 255 or any lt ip_flags gt IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any
470. t leading_street_direction Leading street direction trailing_street_suffix Trailing street suffix str_suf Street Suffix house_no House Number house_no_ suffix House number suffix landmark Landmark or vanity address additional_info Additional location information name Bame residence and office occupant zip_code Postal zip code building Building structure apartment Unit apartment suite floor Floor room_number Room number place_type Placetype postal_com_name Postal community name p_o box Post office box P O Box additional_code Addtional code default Show Civic Address Location configuration lt civic_value gt lldpmed The value for the Civic Address Location entry LLDPMED ECS Description Set or show LLDP MED Emergency Call Service 495 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Syntax LLDPMED ecs lt ecs_value gt Parameters lt ecs_value gt lldpmed The value for the Emergency Call Service LLDPMED Policy Delete Description Delete the selected policy Syntax LLDPMED policy delete lt policy_list gt Parameters lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete Example Delete the policy 1 SWITCH gt Ildpmed policy delete 1 LLDPMED Policy Add Description Adds a policy to the list of polices Syntax LLDPMED policy add voice voice_signaling guest_voice guest_voice_signaling softphone_voice video_conferencing streaming_vid
471. t Port list or all default All ports Example Show private VLAN configuration SWITCH gt pvian configuration Private VLAN Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 384 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled PVLANID Ports PVLAN Add Description Add or modify Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Add lt pvlan_id gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Add port17 to port24 in PVLAN10 SWITCH gt pvian add 10 17 24 PVLAN Delete Description Delete Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Delete lt pvlan_id gt 385 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID Example Delete PVLAN10 SWITCH gt pvlan delete 10 PVLAN Lookup Description Lookup Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Lookup lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID Example Lookup PVLAN SWITCH gt lookup PVLAN ID Ports PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All p
472. t lt port_list gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx Xx XX XX XX lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Add Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in port1 and vid1 SWITCH gt mac add 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx xXx XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 371 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Delete Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in vid1 SWITCH gt mac delete 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 MAC Lookup Description Lookup MAC address entry Syntax MAC Lookup lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Lookup state of Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 SWITCH gt mac lookup 00 30 4f 01 01 02 MAC Age Time Description Set or show the MAC address age timer Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 0 10 1000000 O disable default Show age time Default Setting 300 372 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Set agetime value in 30 SWITCH gt mac agetime 30 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_li
473. t Show current per port RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS QoS SWITCH gt security network nas radius_qos enable Security Network NAS RADIUS VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned VLAN Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS VLAN SWITCH gt security network nas radius_vian enable 431 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness and parameters use the global keyword or per port enabledness of Guest VLAN Unless the global keyword is used the lt reauth_max gt and lt allow_if_ea
474. t Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Floor Example 4 Room no Room number Example 450F Place type Place type Example Office Postal community Postal community name Example Leonia name e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object Description e Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value
475. t Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Enable state Port priority Port cost Bridge Priority 0 Auto Default Value STP disabled for all ports 128 0 32 768 153 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will
476. ta including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP 563 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems t
477. tatus This page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information The STP Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears 158 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series STP Bridges Root MSTI Bridge ID EE Al Topology Flag Topology Change Last CIST 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 80 00 00 30 4F 00 00 00 18 20000 Steady Od 03 11 08 Auto Refresh O Figure 4 7 8 STP Bridge Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well This page contains settings for aggregations and physical ports The aggregation settings are stack global Th
478. tch Access Statistics Description Show or clear access management statistics Syntax Security Switch Access Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear access management statistics Default Setting disable Example Show access management statistics SWITCH gt security switch access statistics Access Management Statistics Receive Discard Receive Discard Receive Discard Receive Discard Receive Discard Security Switch SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Security Switch SNMP Configuration 399 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Show SNMP configuration SWITCH gt security switch snmp configuration SNMP Configuration Enabled SNMP Version 2c Read Community public Write Community private Trap Mode Disabled Trap Version 51 Trap Community public Trap Destination Trap IPv6 Destination Trap Authentication Failure Enabled Trap Link up and Link down Enabled Trap Inform Mode Enabled Trap Inform Timeout seconds 1 Trap Inform Retry Times 15 Trap Probe Security Engine ID Enabled Trap Security Engine ID Trap Security Name None SNMPv3 Engine ID 800007e5017f000001 SNMPv3 Communities Table Idx Community Source IP Source Mask 2 private Number of entries 2 SNMPv3 Users Table Idx Engine ID User Name Auth Priv Local default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None 400 User s
479. tegrity Port Mirroring UP Link Source Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 5 Port Mirror application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring 113 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 6 appears Mirror Configuration Stack Global Settings Port to mirror to Mirror Port Configuration for Switch 1 0002 WN Ke a lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Figure 4 4 6 Port Mirror Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port to mirror to Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Disabled disables mirroring 114 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series e Switch to mirror to Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored to this switch e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitte
480. tem will load the new software after reboot Firmware Upgrade in progess The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will reboot after the Upgrade Until then do not reset or power off the device v Completed Figure 4 2 19 Software successfully loaded notice screen 87 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without pressing the OK button after the image has been loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 4 2 16 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 20 appears TFTP Firmware Upgrade O TFTP Server IP P Server IP ee See File Name Figure 4 2 20 TFTP Firmware Update page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Click to upgrade firmware DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complet
481. ters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto 485 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Default Setting auto Example Set key1 for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp key 1 4 1 LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Show LACP role Default Setting active Example Set passive for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp role 1 4 passive LACP Status Description Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 486 Example Show LACP status of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp status 1 4 Partner System ID Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Statistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics Example Show LACP statistics of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp statistics 1 4 Port RxFrames Tx Frames 487 Rx Unknown Rx Illegal User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Partner Port User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 13 LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Descrip
482. tes each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 through 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Provide the IPv6 SNTP Server address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e VLAN ID Buttons Save Click to save changes Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 Re
483. that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e Sender IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation e Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear e Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation 213 e ARP SMAC Match User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames whe
484. that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit Without removing power cable the device will still consume power from the power source In view of Saving the Energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection from the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To avoid the poten
485. the QCL ID to which this QCE applies e ToS Precedence Class Buttons Cancel Wizard Next Click to continue the wizard Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use QoS Control List Configuration CAMA QCE Type Type Value Traffic Class E 191 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 9 2 4 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets The Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping screen in Figure 4 9 6 appears Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets QCL ID Tag Priority0 Class w Tag Priority1 Class Tag Priority2 Class Tag Priority3 Class y 3 Figure 4 9 6 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCLID Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies e VLAN Priority Class Buttons Cancel Wizard Next Click to continue the wizard Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE Click to cancel the wizard Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step
486. the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 177 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series screen in Figure 4 8 7 appears IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier 1 O Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e IGMP Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected e IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN The Querier will send out if no Querier received in 255 seconds after IGMP Querier Enabled Each Querier s interval is 125 second and it will stop act as an IGMP Querier if received any Querier from other devices Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID E gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 5 Port G
487. the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the SGSW Managed Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures Then the following message asks the login username and password The factory default password is as follows and the login screen in Figure 5 1 appears Username admin Password admin Y COM1 115200band Tera Term YT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help Boot loader v1 07 built Nov 26 2009 fis load managed go Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers l 5T2 1 ST1 1 21 41 6l 8l 110112114116 1181201221241 11 31 Si 71 9111113115 1171191211231 1211 1221 1231 1241 Username admin Login in progress SH TCH Master gt i Figure 5 1 SGSW Managed Switch Console Login screen For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface 341 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Configure IP address The SGSW Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following
488. the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 Class A 2006 A1 2007 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 Al 2001 A2 2003 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2008 A2 2010 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 IEC 61000 4 5 2005 TEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 21 Dec 2011 E ARA Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP PoE Managed Stackable Switch Model Number SGSW 2
489. the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port 267 e Limit User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port
490. thentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advanta
491. ther devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or
492. tial effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately UL Warning PLANET SGSW 24040P 24040P4 has IEEE 802 3af PoE function and complies with UL safety In order to comply with UL specifications please refer to UL s PoE rules as shown in the table below Clause Title Marking or Instruction Details Description of The PoE is intended to be connected to exposed outside plant network or equivalent installation instructions Statement of PoE capable of providing maximum power in installation instructions See attached User s Manual for details PoE Installation Instruction PoE Provides Maximum Power This equipment is only to be connected to PoE networks without routing to outside plant User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series A Elevated Operating Ambient If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient Therefore consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature Tma specified by the m Statement of PoE is capable of providing maximum pow
493. time The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears System Information Contact Name SGSW 24040P Location Hardware MAC Address 00 30 4f 16 81 69 Power Status AC Power Temperature 485C 1193F Time System Date 1970 01 01 Thu 02 03 05 0000 System Uptime 0d 02 03 05 1 1 7b120322 Auto Refresh O Figure 4 2 1 System Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact e Name The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name e Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location e MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch e Power Status Indicate AC DC power supply input of this switch Only SGSW 24040R 24240R support DC power supply input e Temperature Indicate main chipset temperature e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any e System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational e Swithc ID The switch ID e Software Version The software version of the switch 68 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page
494. tion Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration Example Show IP configuration Switch gt ip configuration IP Configuration Disabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 0 0 0 0 Disabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 230 4fff fe24 4d1 IPv6 Address IPv6 Prefix 192 168 0 100 IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enable disable 356 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable Example Disable DHCP sever SWITCH gt ip dhep disable IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID 21 Example Set IP address SWITCH gt ip setup 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 357 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series IP Ping Description Ping IP address ICMP echo
495. tion Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP configuration of port1 4 SWITCH gt lldp configuration 1 4 LLDP Configuration Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled LLDP Mode Description Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx 488 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception and transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable port1 LLDP function SWITCH gt Ildp mode 1 enable LLDP Optional TLV Description Show or Set LLDP Optional TLVs Syntax LLDP Optional_TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys_name sys_descr sys_capa mgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the port sysm_name System name sys_descr Description of the system sys_capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TL
496. tion page screenshot Stack Topology The page includes the following fields Object Description e Stack Topology Specifies the type of topology for the stack Chain A chain of switches that is no redundant forwarding paths Ring A ring of switches thereby providing redundant forwarding paths Back to Back Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports Stack Member Count The number of switches in the stack Last Topology Change The time of the last topology change in the stack e Master Switch The MAC address of the current stack master switch e Last Master Change The time of the last master change in the stack m Stack List For each switch in the stack the following information is shown The MAC address Switch ID product name and version and master election state The master election state is normally No Only when a forced master election is enforced by the user the master election state takes the value Yes For details about the master election algorithm see Stack Configuration The Stack List screen in Figure 4 17 8 appears Stack List E Product Master Stack Member Switch ID Name Version Priority Time Reelect 1 D0 30 4f 24 04 Da PLANET SGSW 24040R Managed Switch 1 5b100623 3 Dd 00 22 17 No 00 30 4f 76 27 10 2 PLANET SGSW 24040P Managed Switch 1 5b100623 3 No Figure 4 17 8 Stack Information page screenshot Stack List 336 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Serie
497. tocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack 564 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET
498. tree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Buttons Add new view Click to add a new view entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 103 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 3 5 5 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page The entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 8 appears SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name 1 default_ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view Y None vi O default_rw_ group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view v default_view Y Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v
499. ture PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps Layer 2 Managed Stackable Switch Model Number SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Produced by Manufacturer s Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 Class A 2006 A1 2007 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 Al 2001 A2 2003 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2008 A2 2010 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 TEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address
500. type O Al ov 00310 0M20N Es o h N i E a gt o ar k co wo No N nN N N q SH SSS SHS SS SHS HSS SS SS SSS SS SS SSS SIS Se SSS SSNS BBE E E E Se E E E E E E E E E E E E E E O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA AA PA PA 13 Pa PA PA A AA PA PA A AA PA AA PA SIS Sy SHS S SSS SSS S SSS S SSN SS No pzs Figure 4 6 2 VLAN Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to V
501. uit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using
502. ult Source MAC Address is enabled e Destination MAC The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for Address the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled e IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 3 appears 118 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Aggregation Group Configuration for Switch 1 o Port Members Locality Group 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Nomal OCCO OOO 0000000 Global 000000000 Global N M N gt Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local 000000000000000 000000000000000 000000000000000 O O O O O O Local O O O O O O O O 00000000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 Local Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration page scree
503. ulti 802 1X MAC based Auth Name IEEE Name Description MAC dotixAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant client Address rameSource VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last supplicant client was received Version dotixAuthLastEapolF 802 1X based rameVersion The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable 243 Selected Counters Object User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Identity 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Description e Selected Counters Port Counters Object The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Description e Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address
504. unit over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices PDs which are connected to ports Under some conditions the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU The system may a prior be planed with a PSU capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system In order to maintain the majority of ports active power management is implemented The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current The input power consumption is equal to the system s aggregated power consumption The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected When this value is exceeded ports will be deactivated according to user defined priorities The power budget is managed according to the following user definable parameters maximum available power ports priority maximum allowable power per port Reserved Power determined by There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports A Classification mode In this mode each port automatic determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to and reserves the power accordingly Four different port classes exist and one for 4 7 15 4 and 30 8 Watts 317 U
505. ups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Example To add IPv6 NTP server SWITCH gt ip ntp server ipv6 add 1 2001 7b8 3 2c 123 IP NTP Server Delete Description Delete NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 Example To delete NTP server SWITCH gt ip ntp server delete 1 363 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 6 4 Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Example Display port1 4 status SWITCH gt port configuration 1 4 Port Configuration Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link Enabled Disabled Enabled Discard Down Enabled Disabled Enabled Discard Down Enabled Disabled Enabled Discard Down Enabled Disabled Enabled Discard Down Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt 1Ohdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdx auto 364 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 10
506. uration pertaining to it 6 Deleting an active switch will leave it with an unassigned Switch ID until rebooted or manually assigning a Switch ID Master Capable Indicates whether a switch is capable of being master An unmanaged switch for example will not be Master Capable Master Priority The priority that the switch has in the master election process The smaller the priority the more likely the switch will become master during the master election process Switch Type The product name of the switch Start Master Election By checking this option the Save operation will also start the master election process This is done by clicking Start Master Election followed by Save This causes the first two criteria to be ignored thereby basing master election only on master 334 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series priority and MAC address When master election is enforced the first two criteria are ignored for a period of 10 15 seconds Within a managed stack one master switch or just master must be elected Any switch not being master is a slave switch or just slave To elect a master the following criteria are evaluated sequentially 1 If any switch already claims to have been master for more than 30 seconds then that switch will become master 2 If multiple switches claim to have been master for more than 30 seconds then the switch which has been master for the longe
507. ure 4 7 14 STP Port Status page screenshot 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 al 1 al 1 al AL af 4 2 2 P 2 Ea 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values a AlternatePort E BackupPort E RootPort E DesignatedPort e State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values 168 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series a Disabled E Blocking E Learning Forwarding a Non STP e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh H Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 7 9 Port Statistics This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 15 appears STP Statistics for Switch 1 port Transmitted Received Discarded i STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TEN unknown Illegal o 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3571 0 1 16 1032 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Auto Refresh C1 Figure 4 7 15 STP Statistics page screen
508. urity Switch SNMP Trap LInk Up cion rod 406 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode ooococccoccccconoccnonononcnononcncnnnoncnnnnnonnn ran n unat r rr narrar rn 407 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform TiMeOUt oooocconcccnnnocicinonaccnononononanonononnno cnn roo n nn nano rr rr rana rre 408 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry TiMES ooooonoccccnnnocccononcccnononcnnnnnn cnn n nono cnn ano nr rr naar rra 408 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID oooonnonnnccccnnnocccononaccnononononononcnnnnno cnn rnnn cnn nan nr rr nnnn raras 409 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine lD oooononcccnnnnniconococcnnnonnnononancnn nono nn nono non n nano nn rn rra 409 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security NAME oooooocccconcoccccnonoccnononononononnnonono cnn nnon cnn naar rr rra 410 Security Switch SNMP Engine D s css aes eesti sie 410 Security Switch SNMP Community Add 0 0 cece eeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeesaeeeseeaaeeeseeeeeeesneeeeeenaeeeeeenaees 410 Security Switch SNMP Community Delete 0 ec eee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeesaaeeesesaaeeeseneaeeesnaeeeeeeaeeeeneeaees 411 Security Switch SNMP Community LOOkKUP ooooccoccccnnnoccnonononnnononcnonan nono nono cnn o nonn nono nr rr nan rre n rre 411 Security Switch SNMP User Add cuicos A de e a 412 Security Switch SNMP User Delete isiin e e irc 413 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey cccooocccccococccononcncnononcnnnonnncnnno cnn crono nn nr non n rra 413 Security Sw
509. us port and one or more isolated or host ports This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN This is the default setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 9 Private VLAN Membership Configuration The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs The Private VLAN Membership Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 7 appears Private VLAN Membership Configuration for Switch 1 Aris SS S d delete pveanzo a gt 3 4 5 6 7 9 Fojos 1 AOMEOMEMEMENNaAMdMEEAENMEEMEMMMAAEA Figure 4 6 7 Private VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot 140 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series The page include
510. use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged 301 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use wit
511. vailability 7 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No pa
512. variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth 233 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication use
513. vate VLAN Setup steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolate port Set Port5 and Port 6 in Promiscuous port The screen in Figure 4 6 15 appears 148 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Figure 4 6 15 The configuration of Isolate and Promiscuous port 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 5 and Port 3 VLAN 2 Port 3 Port 6 The screen in Figure 4 6 16 appears Port Members Figure 4 6 16 Private VLAN port setting 149 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 7 1 Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D E RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w a MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links ar
514. vate VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header This feature works across the stack The Port Isolation Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 6 appears Port Isolation Configuration for Switch 1 Promiscuous Promiscuous EEES Promiscuous i Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous lt i GE SESE Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Y Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous i e Promiscuous Promiscuous lt lt Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous lt Promiscuous lt Promiscuous 139 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Figure 4 6 6 Port Isolation Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch interface e PVLAN Port Type Displays private VLAN port types Isolated A single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuo
515. ve Description Set or show MVR port state about immediate leave Syntax MVR Immediate Leave lt port_list gt enable disable 524 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Immediate leave mode disable Disable Immediate leave mode default Show MVR Immediate leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable MVR port state about immediate leave for port 1 SWITCH gt mvr immediate leave 1 enable 525 6 22 Voice VLAN Command Voice VLAN Configuration Description Show Voice VLAN configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Configuration Example Show Voice VLAN configuration SWITCH gt voice vian configuration Voice VLAN Configuration Disabled Voice VLAN VLAN ID 1000 Voice VLAN Age Time seconds 86400 Voice VLAN Traffic Class High Voice VLAN OUI Table PLANET phones Cisco phones H3C phones Philips and NEC AG phones Pingtel phones Polycom phones 3Com phones Siemens AG phones Voice VLAN Port Configuration 526 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Security Discovery Protocol Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disable
516. ve 1 restart Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt up down 368 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series lt command gt _ The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics filtered Show filtered statistics low Show low priority statistics normal Show normal priority statistics medium Show medium priority statistics high Show high priority statistics default Show all port statistics up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 369 6 5 MAC Address Table Command Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Mac address state User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series 370 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series MAC Add Description Add MAC address table entry Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr g
517. vice to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The unit front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the switch Figure 2 1 to 2 4 shows the front panel of the Managed Switches SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Front Panel TET IET TEETE ea EEES gt Cs THER JU JU JN JU Figure 2 1 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R front panel SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 Front Panel Figure 2 2 SGSW 24040P SGSW 24040P4 front panel SGSW 24240 SGSW 24240R Front Panel DPLANET scsw rs2s0 Figure 2 3 SGSW 24240 SGSW 24240R front panel SGSW 24040HP Front Panel Figure 2 4 SGSW 24040HP front panel 36 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters Gigabit SFP slots 1000Base SX LX mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters Multi mode fiber up to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers Single mode fiber Console Port The console port is a DB9 RS 232 male serial port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached R
518. vices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging Hi VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame M Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch 128 Hi Untagged VLANs User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form
519. want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network Multicast Receiver Multicast 4 Switch Transmitter P A IPTV s Server Router Switch Switch Multicast Switch Receiver O Multicast y Receiver ay D Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service 171 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series B Multicast Receiver Multicast Switch Transmitter A IPTV Server Router Switch C Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 2 Multicast flooding B Multicast Receiver Multicast IGMP Snooping Transmitter Switch A IPTV Server Router IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Switch Switch C I IGMP
520. will be undone 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined for this Managed Switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined m The maximum number of ACEs is 128 a Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 2 appears 208 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP e Action Indicates th
521. work nas guest_vlan enable Security Network NAS Authenticate Description Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process 432 Syntax Security Network NAS Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately Example Start NAS authentication now for port 1 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series SWITCH gt security network nas authenticate 1 now Security Network NAS Siatistics Description Show or clear 802 1X statistics Syntax Security Network NAS Statistics lt port_list gt clear eapol radius Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL statistics radius Show Backend Server statistics default Show all statistics Example Show 802 1X statistics in port 1 SWITCH gt security network nas statistics 1 Port 1 EAPOL Statistics Rx Total O Tx Total Rx Response ld 0 Tx Request ld Rx Response O Tx Request Rx Start Rx Logoff Rx Invalid Type Rx Invalid Length 433 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Port 1 Backend Server Statistics Rx Access Challenges Tx Responses Rx Other Requests Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures Security Network ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Security Network ACL Configuration lt port_list gt
522. write_view_name gt Parameters lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to lt security_model gt any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_level gt noAuthNoPriv None authentication and none privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and none privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy lt read_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values lt write_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values 417 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Example Add SNMPv3 access entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp access add group_snmpv3 usm authpriv snmpv3_view snmpv3_view Security Switch SNMP Access Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 access entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp access delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 access entry SWITCH gt security switch snmp access lookup
523. y the destination IP filter for this ACE 215 User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is setto Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear e DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation e DIP Mask ICMP Parameters Object When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Description e ICMP Type Filter e ICMP Type Value Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value e ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a s
524. yslog on this page The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears Remote Syslog Configuration Figure 4 2 16 Remote Syslog page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the remote syslog mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable remote syslog mode operation Disabled Disable remote syslog mode operation e Syslog Server IP Fill in your remote syslog server IP address Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 85 4 2 14 SMTP Configure User s Manual of SGSW 24040 24240 Series This page facilitates a SMTP Configure the switch The SMTP Configure screen in Figure 4 2 17 appears SMTP Configuration SMTP Mode O Enable SMTP Server lt 128 Digits SMTP Port 1 65535 SMTP Authentication Authentication User Name lt 64 Digits lt 21 Digits Email From lt 128 Digits lt A Digits lt 128 Digits lt 128 Digts Figure 4 2 17 SMTP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SMTP Mode Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch e SMTP Server Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server e SMTP Port Set port number of SMTP service e SMTP Authentication Controls whether SMTP authentication is enabled If authentication is required whe

User`s Manual of SGSW-24040 / 24240 Series 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents